Magellan 9300i 9400i PDF

MagellanTM 9300i / 9400i
Scanner and Scanner-Scale with Imaging Technology
Product Reference Guide

Datalogic ADC, Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, OR 97402
USA
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140
© 2015 Datalogic ADC, Inc.

An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the proce-
dures described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writ-
ten permission of Datalogic ADC, Inc. or its subsidiaries or affiliates ("Datalogic" or “Datalogic ADC”). Owners
of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this
documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter
any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure that
all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.
Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by contacting your
Datalogic representative. Electronic versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website
(www.datalogic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit our website and would like to make
comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact
Datalogic" page.
Disclaimer
Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accu-
rate, however, Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at any time without prior notice.
Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including
the U.S.A. and the E.U. All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Magellan is a registered trademark of Datalogic ADC, Inc. in many countries, including the U.S.A. and All-
Weighs, FirstStrike, SmartSentry and SurroundScan are registered trademarks of Datalogic ADC, Inc. in the
U.S.A. OmegaTek, Produce Rail, Productivity Index Reporting, and ScaleSentry are all trademarks of Data-
logic ADC, Inc.
Patents
See www.patents.datalogic.com for patent list.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 1
Manual Overview............................................................................................................................... 2
How to Use This Manual .......................................................................................................... 3
Scanner Nomenclature..................................................................................................................... 4
Connectors and Ports............................................................................................................... 5
Physical Parameters......................................................................................................................... 7
Scanning .................................................................................................................................... 7
EAS Tag Deactivation System ................................................................................................. 7
Weighing.................................................................................................................................... 8
Scale SentryTM Option .............................................................................................................. 8
Warm-Up Time.......................................................................................................................... 9
Electrical Specifications..................................................................................................................10
Power Supply ..........................................................................................................................10
Safety Precautions .................................................................................................................11
Labeling ............................................................................................................................................12
Agency Compliances .......................................................................................................................13
Bar Codes Supported ......................................................................................................................15
1D Symbologies ......................................................................................................................15
2D Symbologies ......................................................................................................................15
Technical Support............................................................................................................................16
Datalogic Website Support ....................................................................................................16
Reseller Technical Support ....................................................................................................16
Telephone Technical Support ................................................................................................16
Chapter 2. Site Preparation and Installation ..................................................................................17

Pre-Installation Considerations ....................................................................................................18
Checkstand Design Recommendations........................................................................................19
Scanner Installation ........................................................................................................................20
Scanner Maintenance.....................................................................................................................20
References .......................................................................................................................................20
Scanner Usage.................................................................................................................................21
Site Preparation Overview..............................................................................................................21
Ventilation and Spacing..................................................................................................................23
Service Access .................................................................................................................................24
Power Installation...........................................................................................................................24
Product Reference Guide i

Grounding ................................................................................................................................25
Checkstand Preparation .................................................................................................................25
Liquid Spills and Moisture .....................................................................................................25
Counter Cutout ................................................................................................................................26
Checkstand Mounting ............................................................................................................32
Installation Overview ......................................................................................................................32
Unpacking ................................................................................................................................33
Operational Verification .........................................................................................................34
Diagnostic Modes ...................................................................................................................36
Cables & Connections.............................................................................................................38
Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation ............................................................................40
Lighting Considerations .........................................................................................................40
Viewing Angle..........................................................................................................................40
Remote Display Cabling .........................................................................................................41
Placing and Installing the Remote Display ..........................................................................41
Changing Weighing Modes ....................................................................................................43
Set-Up & Installation ......................................................................................................................43
Set-up ......................................................................................................................................43
System Power-Up Recap................................................................................................................47
Chapter 3. Operation and Maintenance ..........................................................................................49

Scanning Items .......................................................................................................................49
Proper Weighing Technique (Scale Models).........................................................................50
Deactivating Security Labels .................................................................................................51
Operational Controls.......................................................................................................................52
Operational Modes..........................................................................................................................52
Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation ...................................................................................53
Operating Mode ......................................................................................................................54
Additional Functions.......................................................................................................................55
Programming ..........................................................................................................................55
Diagnostic Mode .....................................................................................................................55
Scanner and Scale Reset........................................................................................................55
Scale Adjustments..................................................................................................................55
Operational Maintenance...............................................................................................................57
Cleaning ...................................................................................................................................57
Vertical Scan Window Replacement.....................................................................................58
Chapter 4. Image Capture and Customer Service Scanner ...........................................................61

Image Capture Feature...................................................................................................................61
Optional CSS Feature ......................................................................................................................62
Chapter 5. Problem Isolation ............................................................................................................63

Diagnostic Procedures....................................................................................................................64
Error Codes.......................................................................................................................................64
Scale Error Reporting ......................................................................................................................67
Flowcharts .......................................................................................................................................68
Chapter 6. Calibration Procedures ...................................................................................................75

Description of Calibration Sequence .............................................................................................76
ii Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

Motion Test......................................................................................................................................76
Automatic Zero Setting Test ..........................................................................................................77
Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration ...............................................................................77
Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms).................................................................................78
Calibration Verification (Pounds)...................................................................................................81
Calibration Verification (Kilograms)...............................................................................................86
Chapter 7. Programming ...................................................................................................................91

Introduction to Label Programming..............................................................................................91
Understanding the Basics..............................................................................................................91
Using a Bar Code Mask ..........................................................................................................91
Going Green .............................................................................................................................91
Bar Code Mask ........................................................................................................................92
Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System ........................................................................93
Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation ........................................................................................93
Programming Overview..................................................................................................................94
Programming via Handheld Device ......................................................................................94
What Is Programming Mode?................................................................................................94
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode ...........................................................................94
Programming Session............................................................................................................95
Programming Sequence.........................................................................................................96
LED and Beeper Indicators ....................................................................................................98
If You Make a Mistake............................................................................................................98
Test Mode ................................................................................................................................99
Chapter 8. Imaging and CSS Features ...........................................................................................101

Imaging Features ..........................................................................................................................101
How to Capture an Image ....................................................................................................102
Image Camera .......................................................................................................................104
Image Format........................................................................................................................105
Image Size .............................................................................................................................106
Image Brightness..................................................................................................................107
Image Contrast......................................................................................................................109
Image Compression..............................................................................................................111
CSS Features..................................................................................................................................112
CSS Button Option ................................................................................................................112
Chapter 9. General Scanner and Scale Features ..........................................................................113

1D Double Read Timeout..............................................................................................................113
2D Double Read Timeout..............................................................................................................114
Digital Watermark (DWM) Enable ...............................................................................................115
Digitally Watermarked (DWM) Double Read Timeout...............................................................116
Label Gone Timeout ......................................................................................................................117
Sleep Mode Timer..........................................................................................................................118
1D Inverse Read Control ...............................................................................................................119
2D Inverse Read Control ...............................................................................................................120
Illumination Control ......................................................................................................................120
2D Contrast Improvement............................................................................................................121
Good Read LED Idle State.............................................................................................................122
Product Reference Guide iii

Good Read Lamp Color .................................................................................................................123
Scanner Control Button Options .................................................................................................124
Power-up Tone Control ................................................................................................................125
Good Read Beep Control...............................................................................................................126
Good Read Beep Frequency .........................................................................................................127
Good Read Beep Length ...............................................................................................................128
Good Read Beep Volume ..............................................................................................................129
Good Read When to Indicate........................................................................................................130
Scale Zero Button and Scale Indicator LED ................................................................................131
Scale Sentry ...................................................................................................................................132
Scale Sentry Override Button ..............................................................................................133
Scale Sentry Mode ................................................................................................................134
Scale Sentry Visual Indicator ...............................................................................................135
Scale Sentry Beep Enable ....................................................................................................136
Scale Sentry GRI Enable .......................................................................................................137
Scale Sentry Adaptive Scale Indication State ....................................................................138
Scale Enable...................................................................................................................................139
Scale Diagnostics Mode .......................................................................................................140
Scale Stale Weight Timeout.................................................................................................141
Scale Enforced Zero Return .................................................................................................142
Scale Interface Type..............................................................................................................143
ICL Scale Interface DC1 Character Delay ............................................................................145
Scale Calibration Notification ..............................................................................................146
Scale Intercharacter Delay ...................................................................................................147
Adaptive Scale LED Option ..................................................................................................148
Remote Display — Enable/Disable.............................................................................................149
Auxiliary Port Mode.......................................................................................................................150
Auxiliary USB Mode.......................................................................................................................151
USB Device Port Location .............................................................................................................152
Productivity Index Reporting (PIR) / Cashier Training (CT) .......................................................153
PIR/CT Auxiliary Port Baud Rate.........................................................................................154
Chapter 10. EAS Features ...............................................................................................................157

EAS Features — Sensormatic......................................................................................................157
EAS Mode...............................................................................................................................158
EAS Notification ....................................................................................................................160
EAS Security Level ................................................................................................................161
EAS Good Beep Mode ...........................................................................................................162
EAS Beep Duration ...............................................................................................................163
EAS Retry Count....................................................................................................................164
EAS Exception Button ..........................................................................................................165
EAS Deactivation Duration — Coupled...............................................................................167
EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry ...................................................................................168
EAS Deactivation Duration — Exception............................................................................169
EAS Pre-Read Time ..............................................................................................................170
EAS Error Tones ....................................................................................................................171
EAS Features — Checkpoint ........................................................................................................172
ERI Active State.....................................................................................................................172
ERI Timeout ...........................................................................................................................173
iv Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

Chapter 11. Interface Related Features ........................................................................................175
Interface Type ................................................................................................................................175
RS-232 Interface Selection ..................................................................................................177
USB Interface Selection........................................................................................................178
IBM Interface Selection ........................................................................................................179
Keyboard Interface Selection...............................................................................................180
Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length.........................................................................181
IBM Features .................................................................................................................................182
IBM Interface Options ..........................................................................................................182
IBM Scale Address ................................................................................................................183
IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format............................................................................184
46XX Number of Host Resets .............................................................................................185
46XX Label Slicing Control ...................................................................................................186
46XX Maximum Label Slice Length ....................................................................................187
USB OEM Interface Options .........................................................................................................188
USB OEM Scanner Device Type ...........................................................................................189
RS-232 Features ...........................................................................................................................190
RS-232 Baud Rate ................................................................................................................190
RS-232 Number of Data Bits...............................................................................................192
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits ...............................................................................................193
RS-232 Parity ........................................................................................................................194
RS-232 Hardware Control....................................................................................................195
RS-232 Intercharacter Delay ...............................................................................................196
RS-232 Software Flow Control............................................................................................197
RS-232 Ignore Host Commands .........................................................................................198
RS-232 TTL ............................................................................................................................199
RS-232 TTL Invert .................................................................................................................200
RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL...................................................................................................201
RS-232 Beep After Weigh ....................................................................................................202
Beep on Not on File ..............................................................................................................203
RS-232 ACK NAK Enable ......................................................................................................204
RS-232 ACK Character..........................................................................................................205
RS-232 NAK Character .........................................................................................................206
RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout....................................................................................207
RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value.........................................................................................208
RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count .............................................................................................209
RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling.........................................................................................210
RS-232 Indicate Transmission Failure ...............................................................................211
Single Cable RS-232 Options .......................................................................................................212
Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol ......................................................................213
Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection..............................................................................214
Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC ..............................................................................................216
Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK ....................................................................................217
Single Cable RS-232 Use STX ..............................................................................................218
Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character..............................................................................219
Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX ..............................................................................................220
Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character..............................................................................221
Single Cable RS-232 Datalogic Extensions ........................................................................222
Single Cable RS-232 Pacesetter Plus .................................................................................223
Product Reference Guide v

USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Features..........................................................................224
USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Intercharacter Delay..............................................224
Keyboard Wedge No Keyboard Support.............................................................................225
USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Send Control Characters .......................................226
USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Country Mode ........................................................227
Keyboard Wedge Quiet Interval ..........................................................................................231
USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Caps Lock State .....................................................232
Chapter 12. Data Editing .................................................................................................................233

Data Editing Overview ..................................................................................................................233
Please Keep In Mind... ..........................................................................................................234
Case Conversion ............................................................................................................................234
Character Conversion....................................................................................................................235
Global Prefix...................................................................................................................................236
Global Suffix ...................................................................................................................................237
Global AIM ID Enable.....................................................................................................................238
Label ID Control .............................................................................................................................239
Label ID...........................................................................................................................................240
1D Symbologies.....................................................................................................................240
2D Symbologies.....................................................................................................................245
Global Mid-Label ID.......................................................................................................................246
Chapter 13. 1D Symbology Programming .....................................................................................247

1D Symbologies .............................................................................................................................247
Coupon Control......................................................................................................................248
Coupon Label Priority Timer ................................................................................................249
UPC-A Enable.................................................................................................................................250
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission .............................................................251
UPC-A Check Character Transmission ...............................................................................252
UPC-A Minimum Read .........................................................................................................253
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 ....................................................................................................254
UPC-E Enable.................................................................................................................................255
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission..............................................................256
UPC-E Check Character Transmission................................................................................257
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A ......................................................................................................258
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 ....................................................................................................259
UPC-E Minimum Read .........................................................................................................260
EAN-13 Enable ..............................................................................................................................261
EAN-13 First Character Transmission ...............................................................................262
EAN-13 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................263
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable ........................................................................................264
EAN-13 Minimum Read .......................................................................................................265
EAN-8 Enable ................................................................................................................................266
EAN-8 Check Character Transmission ...............................................................................267
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 ....................................................................................................268
EAN-8 Minimum Read .........................................................................................................269
EAN-8 Guard Insertion .........................................................................................................270
EAN-8 Guard Substitution ...................................................................................................271
EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves ........................................................................................272
vi Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves.......................................................................................273
Other UPC/EAN Options ..............................................................................................................274
In-Store Printed Label Minimum Read ..............................................................................275
UPC/EAN Correlation ...........................................................................................................276
UPC/EAN Guard Insertion ...................................................................................................277
UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves...................................................................................278
UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves .................................................................................279
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length................................................................................280
Price Weight Check ...............................................................................................................282
Enable EAN Two Label .........................................................................................................284
EAN Two Label Minimum Read...........................................................................................285
EAN Two Label Combined Transmission ...........................................................................286
Addons ...................................................................................................................................287
GTIN Enable....................................................................................................................................294
GS1 DataBar...................................................................................................................................295
DataBar Omnidirectional Enable .................................................................................................295
DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 Emulation.................................................................296
DataBar Omnidirectional 2D Component Enable..............................................................297
DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Read..........................................................................298
DataBar Omnidirectional Double Read Timeout ...............................................................299
DataBar Expanded Enable ...........................................................................................................300
DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emulation ............................................................................301
DataBar Expanded 2D Component Enable ........................................................................302
DataBar Expanded Minimum Read ....................................................................................303
DataBar Expanded Length Control .....................................................................................304
DataBar Expanded Length 1................................................................................................305
DataBar Expanded Length 2................................................................................................306
DataBar Expanded Reverse Retry.......................................................................................307
Code 39 Enable ..............................................................................................................................308
Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission......................................................................309
Code 39 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................310
Code 39 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................311
Code 39 Full ASCII .................................................................................................................312
Code 39 Minimum Read.......................................................................................................313
Code 39 Correlation ..............................................................................................................314
Code 39 Length Control........................................................................................................315
Code 39 Length 1 ..................................................................................................................316
Code 39 Length 2 ..................................................................................................................317
Code 39 Stitching ..................................................................................................................318
Code 39 Require Margins.....................................................................................................319
Code 32 Italian Pharmacode Enable ...........................................................................................320
Code 32 Start Stop Character Transmission......................................................................321
Code 32 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................322
Code 128 Enable ............................................................................................................................323
Code 128 Transmit Function Characters............................................................................324
Expand Code128 to Code 39 ................................................................................................325
Code 128 Minimum Read.....................................................................................................326
Code 128 Correlation ............................................................................................................327
Code 128 Length Control......................................................................................................328
Product Reference Guide vii

Code 128 Length 1 ................................................................................................................329
Code 128 Length 2 ................................................................................................................330
Code 128 Stitching ................................................................................................................331
EAN-128 Enable ............................................................................................................................332
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 OF 5) Enable..............................................................................................333
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation....................................................................................334
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ...............................................................................335
I 2 of 5 Minimum Read .........................................................................................................336
I 2 of 5 Correlation.................................................................................................................337
I 2 of 5 Length Control ..........................................................................................................338
I 2 of 5 Length 1 ....................................................................................................................339
I 2 of 5 Length 2 ....................................................................................................................340
I 2 of 5 Stitching ....................................................................................................................341
Codabar Enable..............................................................................................................................342
Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission .....................................................................343
Codabar Start Stop Character Set .......................................................................................344
Codabar Start Stop Character Match..................................................................................345
Codabar Check Character Calculation.................................................................................346
Codabar Check Character Transmission.............................................................................347
Codabar Minimum Read ......................................................................................................348
Codabar Correlation..............................................................................................................349
Codabar Length Control .......................................................................................................350
Codabar Length 1..................................................................................................................351
Codabar Length 2..................................................................................................................352
Codabar Stitching..................................................................................................................353
Codabar Require Margins ....................................................................................................354
Code 93 Enable ..............................................................................................................................355
Code 93 Minimum Read.......................................................................................................356
Code 93 Correlation ..............................................................................................................357
Code 93 Length Control........................................................................................................358
Code 93 Length 1 ..................................................................................................................359
Code 93 Length 2 ..................................................................................................................360
Code 93 Stitching ..................................................................................................................361
MSI Enable .....................................................................................................................................362
MSI Check Character Calculation.........................................................................................363
MSI Number of Check Characters .......................................................................................364
MSI Check Character Transmission ....................................................................................365
MSI Minimum Read ..............................................................................................................366
MSI Correlation......................................................................................................................367
MSI Length Control ...............................................................................................................368
MSI Length 1 .........................................................................................................................369
MSI Length 2 .........................................................................................................................370
MSI Stitching .........................................................................................................................371
Standard 2 of 5 Enable .................................................................................................................372
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation.....................................................................373
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................374
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Read ..........................................................................................375
Standard 2 of 5 Correlation..................................................................................................376
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control ...........................................................................................377
viii Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 .....................................................................................................378
Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 .....................................................................................................379
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching .....................................................................................................380
Chapter 14. 2D Symbology Programming .....................................................................................381

2D Symbologies .............................................................................................................................381
Data Matrix Enable .......................................................................................................................382
Data Matrix Length Control .................................................................................................383
Data Matrix Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions............................................384
PDF 417 Enable .............................................................................................................................385
PDF 417 Length Control.......................................................................................................386
PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions..................................................387
PDF 417 Read Option....................................................................................................................388
Micro PDF 417 Enable...................................................................................................................389
Micro PDF 417 Length Control ............................................................................................390
Micro PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions.......................................391
Micro PDF 417 128 Emulation .....................................................................................................392
QR Code Enable .............................................................................................................................393
QR Code Length Control.......................................................................................................394
QR Code Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions..................................................395
QR Code URL Link Enable ....................................................................................................396
Micro QR Code Enable...................................................................................................................397
Micro QR Code Length Control ............................................................................................398
Micro QR Code Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions.......................................399
Aztec Enable ..................................................................................................................................400
Aztec Length Control............................................................................................................401
Aztec Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions.......................................................402
Appendix A. LED/Audio Indications & Controls......................................................................403

Good Read Indicator......................................................................................................................403
Controls and Indicators ................................................................................................................404
LED and Audio Indications...................................................................................................406
ScaleSentry / Scale Service Button ....................................................................................409
EAS/CSS Button....................................................................................................................410
Scale Zero Button .................................................................................................................411
Scanner Control Button........................................................................................................412
Calibration Switch.................................................................................................................413
Appendix B. Cable Information................................................................................................415

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................415
General Specifications..........................................................................................................415
External Cable Pinouts .................................................................................................................416
Appendix C. Keypad..................................................................................................................419
Appendix D. Host Commands ..................................................................................................421

Accepting Commands from an RS-232 Scanner Host ..............................................................421
Product Reference Guide ix

Appendix E. Factory Defaults................................................................................................... 423
Appendix F. Handheld Data Format Requirements ............................................................... 437

Handheld Data Format Requirements General ................................................................437
Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements..............................................................438
AIM Formats..........................................................................................................................443
x Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

Chapter 1
Introduction
This manual provides details for installation, configuration, calibration and operation
of the scanner or scanning-scale.
For the purposes of this manual, any Magellan 9300i / 9400i model may be
termed as simply “scanner” (including scanning-scale models).
Because of differences due to multiple model types and options, the illustra-
NOTE tions shown in this manual may vary from the model(s) in use at your loca-
tion.
Product Reference Guide 1

Introduction
Manual Overview
Chapter 1, Introduction, presents the manual’s contents, describes features and
specifications, provides regulatory and safety information, and lists the bar code
symbologies the scanner will read.
Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation, supplies physical dimensions for the
scanner or scanning-scale and its most common accessories, and details counter
preparation and installation. Cable routing, connection and testing are also explained
in this section.
Chapter 3, Operation and Maintenance, describes use and maintenance; providing
details about operator controls, programming and diagnostic modes, scale “zeroing”
and calibration. Scanner and scale routine maintenance are outlined in this section as
well.
Chapter 4, Image Capture and Customer Service Scanner, defines the functions of the
optional Customer Service Scanner (CSS) and Image Capture features.
Chapter 5, Problem Isolation, provides an outline of three scanning-scale test modes:
Selftest, Operational Tests and Diagnostic Tests. Descriptions of the error indications
if the scanner detects a system problem and troubleshooting flowcharts to aid in
problem resolution are also presented.
Chapter 6, Calibration Procedures, explains scale calibration and verification
procedures, including procedures for calibrating the scale in pounds as well as
kilograms.
Chapter 7, Programming, and subsequent chapters detail procedures and provide
custom bar codes for setting programmable scanner and scanning-scale features.
Appendix A, LED/Audio Indications & Controls, lists the various functions and
indications of the scanner’s control panel features.
Appendix B, Cable Information, outlines wire requirements, connector specifications
and pinout details for associated product cabling.
Appendix C, Keypad, furnishes bar codes representing the digits and characters
required to enter extended programming data needed during certain programming
sessions.
Appendix D, Host Commands, contains a partial listing of available host commands
that can be used with a compatible host interface.
Appendix E, Factory Defaults, provides a listing of factory default settings based on
the most common interface.
Appendix F, Handheld Data Format Requirements, specifies additional references for
use when a handheld scanner is connected to the scanner.
2 Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

How to Use This Manual
You’ll find it helpful to familiarize yourself with the first section of this manual, since it
provides both a general description of the product’s features and an overview of the
manual’s contents and organization. Reference the other sections as required for
information about scanner or scanning-scale installation, operation, maintenance,
calibration and bar code programming.
Manual Conventions
‘NOTE’ blocks contain information that is helpful and rec-

ommended. They provide information that is critical to
operations and/or procedures described in this manual.
‘LEGAL NOTE’ blocks indicate procedures or activities

LEGAL NOTE
which may be regulated under law by governmental
agencies. It is your responsibility to ensure compliance
with the regulations that govern installation of weighing
devices.
‘CAUTION’ blocks inform you that proper handling (adher-

ence to the procedures described) is required to avoid
damage to equipment and/or property.
‘WARNING’ blocks alert you to potential physical harm or

injury. These statements do not include potentially fatal
hazards, which would be designated as ‘DANGER’ blocks.
Use of this product does not warrant the need for a DAN-
GER block.

Introduction
Scanner Nomenclature
The parts and features of the scanner are shown in Figure 1. Control Panel buttons
and indicators are described in more detail in Appendix A.
Optional features include the Scale (for weighing items)

Customer Service Scanner (CSS) and Electronic Article
Surveillance (EAS). Your scanner may or may not support
all of these capabilities.
NOTE
Figure 1. Scanner Nomenclature
3 6
3 7 2
6
5
5 4
4
8
2
with Platter without Platter
1 Scanning Guides 5 Speaker

2 Control Panel 6 Vertical Scan Window
3 Good Read Indicator LED 7 All WeighsTM Platter
4 Horizontal Scan Window 8 Bubble Level

Connectors and Ports
Connector port availability and appearance will differ between models, since these
optional features may sometimes be added at the time of purchase. See the
illustrations in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3.
• Checkpoint® or Nedap® Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Feature
• Sensormatic® Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Feature
• Scale (weighing) Feature
• Remote Display Accessory (for models with a scale)
• Customer Service Scanner (CSS)
Figure 2. Optional EAS Cable Connections
To Checkpoint® To Sensormatic®
or Nedap® EAS System EAS System

Introduction
Figure 3. Connector Panel
AUXILIARY PORT EAS SCALE HOST HOST PORT

· Application Download · Provides Good Read Scale Data (dual · Label Data
to attached RS-232 output to enable EAS cable scanner/scale) · Scale Data (for
Handheld Scanner antenna RF output single cable interfaces)
· Application Download
(where appropriate)
Connection to Connection to Dual cable units only.

this port is this port is (Scale connection may
Optional Optional be handled through
POS Terminal port)
SCALE 0.00 REMOTE IMAGE

AUX EAS HOST
HOST USB DISPLAY POWER PORT
PORT
Connector Bulkhead
AUX EAS HOST
PORT
USB PORTS REMOTE DISPLAY POWER USB ‘B’ IMAGE PORT

· USB Handheld Drives Remote Display AC Brick Input · Connects to archive
Scanner Input OR drive or other device
· USB-to-Serial adapter Power off Terminal for saving captured
used for scale cali- (POT) Brick Input image files.
bration testing.
Connection to Models with scale Connection to

these ports is only this port is
Optional Optional

Physical Parameters
This section provides specifications for performance, environmental and electrical
parameters. Reference the second section of this manual, Site Preparation and
Installation, for physical measurements of all models and some accessories.
Scanning
A scan zone (Figure 4) exists in the area between the horizontal and vertical scan
windows. Separate projections from each of these sources combine to form a zone
where bar code labels are read. Refer to the Operation and Maintenance section of
this manual for more details about the topic: Scanning Items.
Figure 4. Scan Zone
4
1 3
1 Vertical Scan Zone 4 Combined Scan Zone

2
Horizontal Scan Zone 5 Targeting Guides
3
EAS Tag Deactivation System

Scanners can be ordered from the factory to include an optional EAS (Electronic Article
Surveillance) deactivation system. Multiple EAS system types are available. At the
time of this writing they are: Checkpoint1 (for Counterpoint IX and Evolve D11 models),
Sensormatic2 and Nedap.
The Sensormatic® deactivation system requires connection as shown in Figure 2a.
Reference Chapter 3, "Deactivating Security Labels" for more information about its
use.
Contact Technical Support for information about installation of the Sensormatic AMB-
9010/IPS EAS Deactivation Controller (AMB-5120) controller box. Additional details
about this system can be referenced under the following topics:
• Chapter 3, "Deactivating Security Labels"
• Chapter 10, "EAS Features — Sensormatic"
1. Checkpoint is a registered trademark of Checkpoint Systems, Inc

2. Sensormatic is a registered trademark of Sensormatic Electronics Corporation.

Introduction
Weighing
Specifications for scale capacity, settling time, minimum and maximum static weight,
zeroing, and warm-up time are given below. For more information regarding the topic:
Proper Weighing Technique (Scale Models), refer to the Operation and Maintenance
section of this manual.
Rated Weight Capacity

The scale’s operational weight capacity is:
• 30.00 pounds, displayed in 0.01 increments
OR
• 15.000 kilograms1, displayed in 0.005 increments.
Minimum Weight
The minimum weight that can be accurately measured by the scale is 0.01 lb. (0.005
kg).
Maximum Static Weight (Overload)

A maximum static weight of 150 pounds (68 kg) can be sustained by the scale without
incurring damage or degrading performance.
Automatic Zero Maintenance

The scale’s software constantly monitors and adjusts the Zero point as long as the
deviation is within acceptable limits2, while compensating for any debris
accumulation or removal. During power-up, the scale automatically re-zeros after
verifying that all subsystems are functional. Additionally, the scale may be manually
“zeroed” by pushing the Scale Zero Button located on the control panel.
Scale SentryTM Option

The optional ScaleSentry feature monitors items placed on the platter to ensure they
are not overhanging and touching non-weighing surfaces. If the system’s infrared (IR)
beams sense items encroaching past the sides of the weigh platter, the speaker will
sound a unique tone and/or the ScaleSentry LED indicator will illuminate to indicate a
ScaleSentry error condition. ScaleSentry optionally blocks the transmission of weight
to the host depending on how it is configured (see "Scale Sentry" starting on
page 132). The scanner/scale can be programmed to just beep and/or light the LED if
there is a ScaleSentry issue. Reference Using the Optional ScaleSentryTM Feature on
page 51 for more ScaleSentry options and details.
1. The scale can also be set at the factory for 9.99 kg max.
2. Acceptable limits of deviation are set at -0.2 to +0.6 pounds (-0.078kg to 0.23kg), which is -0.67 to +2.0% of total capacity.

Warm-Up Time
There are two pertinent warm-up times that apply to the scanning-scale:
The two warm-up periods can be performed concurrently, thereby reducing the total
required warm-up time to 60 minutes.
NOTE
Thermal Equilibrium
When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature (such as a storage area) to a
warmer environment (such as a checkstand location), 60 minutes must be allowed to
acclimate the unit to ambient conditions prior to calibration or operation.
Power-up
Once installed and powered up, a warm-up time of 15 minutes must be allowed
before calibrating or performing weighing operations.
Figure 5. Environmental Specifications
Operation Storage
+40° C +104° F
0° C 32° F
POS
Scan
Temperature ner
+10° to +40° C
50° to +104° F Dust Resistant Optics Cavity, IP5X
Illumination +70° C +158° F

Sunlight:
Artificial Light: 0-8,000 Foot-candles
0-450 Foot-candles (86,114 LUX)
(4844 LUX) -40° C -40° F
Spill Proof Humidity Temperature

(Datalogic MS-0006-13-0004) 5 - 95% -40° to +70° C
-40° to +158° F

Introduction
Electrical Specifications
Before installation, always verify that the site’s electrical service meets the scanner’s
requirements. The scanner has been engineered for compatibility with most
international electrical systems operating in ranges from 100 to 240VAC at 50-60 Hz.
Verify that the power source will supply “clean” electrical power to the equipment;
that is, it must be free of excess electrical noise.
Check the IEC power cord shipped with the scanning-scale. If the cord will not plug
into your AC power receptacle, the power cord shipped is not compatible with your
electrical system. Please contact your distributor immediately to receive the
necessary information and components to ensure electrical compatibility.
Power Supply
The scanner utilizes a single power supply for all models. Unique installation and
international connections are accomplished through selection of the proper IEC power
cord
VOLTAGE FREQUENCY CURRENT (RMS)
100-240VAC ±10% 50-60 Hz 0.5 Amps @ 100V
Safe operation of your scanner or scanning-scale requires properly grounded electri-

cal outlets. Be sure to have a qualified electrician certify the earth-ground connec-
tion on circuits which will be used to power the unit.
CAUTION
The scanner is powered on/off by connecting/disconnecting its power supply.
NOTE

Safety Precautions
No adjustments or alteration of the scanner or scanning-scale housing are to be

attempted by the user.
CAUTION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
WARNING cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, here is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equip-
ment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Introduction
Labeling
Regulatory, reference and safety labeling is shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6. Labeling
1
SCALE HOST 0.00 REMOTE IMAGE
AUX EAS HOST PORT
USB DISPLAY POWER PORT
AUX
EAS
SCAL
E
HOST
HOST
PORT
USB
AUX 0.00
REMO
DISPLATE
EAS Y
POWE
HOSTALE R
SC IMAGE
PORT
PORTST
HO
USB
LAYTE
DISP
REMO
0.00 ER
POW
PORTAGE
IM
0.00
IMAGE REMOTE HOST SCALE
PORT POWER DISPLAY USB PORT HOST EAS AUX
3
4
Underside of Scanner Beneath the Scanner’s Platter

1 Connector Bulkhead Label 3 Serial Number Label
Scale Regulatory Label (units with
2 Regulatory - I/F Label 4
scales only)

Agency Compliances
The scanner and scanning-scale meets or exceeds the requirements for its device
type as set forth by the following agencies and regulations:
COUNTRY COMPLIANCE COMMENTS

Safety
United States UL60950-1 cULus Approved
World IEC60950 CB certification
Korea K-60950-1 Included in CB
EMC/EMI
47 CFR Part 15B - 15.107 &
USA FCC Class B
15.109
Australia/N Zealand AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class B
Canada ICES-003 Class B
Europe CISPR 22 Class B
Japan VCCI Class B
Taiwan CNS13438
ROW CISPR 22 Class B
Korea KN-22, KN-24 KCC mark
Optical Emissions
Europe and ROW EN/IEC 62471 LED illumination
Weights & Measures (Scale units only)
NIST Handbook 44
United States NCWM-NTEP
(Dept. of Commerce)
Canada Measurement Canada Weights and Measures Act
Europe 2009/23/EEC EN45501
National Measurement Insti-
Australia NMI R76, Parts 1 and 2
tute (NMI)
New Zealand 1999 Part 1 Regulations 5 and 6
Measuring Instruments-
Instruments Non-automatic
Mexico NOM-010-SCFI-1994 weighing-functioning tech-
nical and metrological
requirements
Bureau Interna-
OIML R76-1 and R76-2 Class III scale, non-auto-
tional de Métrologie
certification matic weighing
Légale (BIML)

Introduction
COUNTRY COMPLIANCE COMMENTS

Power Supply
USA/Canada Safety cULusa, UL60950-1
State of California CEC-400-2010-012 Energy Efficiency Standard
Canada NR Canada Energy Efficiency Standard
Safety, EMC and energy effi-
Europe CE and Level IV efficiency
ciency Erp2009/125 EEC
CB Safety Scheme per TUV
ROW CB cert Safety IEC60950-1:2005/EN60950-
1:A12
Mexico NOM and CONUEE Safety and Energy Efficiency
Japan PSE Safety J60950-1 and J55022
Russia GOST
Safety AS/NZS 60950-1 and
Australia RCM and MEPS AS.NZS4665 (energy effi-
ciency)
Safety, EMC and Energy Effi-
Korea KCC and MEPS
ciency
Safety CNS 14336-1 and
Taiwan BSMI
EMC CNS 13438
Safety and EMC GB17625-1,
China CCC
GB4942.1, GB9254
Argentina IRAM S mark Safety
South Africa SABS Safety
Contact Datalogic ADC, Inc. or your Datalogic representative for a complete listing of
approvals for other countries.

Bar Codes Supported
The scanner can read/decode the following 1D and 2D bar code types (symbologies):
1D Symbologies
• UPC Versions A & E
• Plural Stage Dual UPC Bar Codes for Japan ( 2 label read)
• GSI DataBar Omnidirectional, DataBar Expanded, DataBar Stacked
• EAN-8 & 13
• JAN-8 & 13
• UCC/EAN 128
• GTIN Support
• Code 39
• Code 39 full ASCII
• Code 128 (including conversion to Code 39)
• Code 93
• Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
• Industrial 2 of 5 (sometimes referred to as Standard 2 of 5)
• Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code)
• Codabar
• MSI
• Digimarc®
2D Symbologies
• PDF417, including driver’s license parsing
• MicroPDF
• Data Matrix
• Aztec
• QR Code
• Micro QR

Introduction
Technical Support
Datalogic Website Support

The Datalogic website (www.datalogic.com) is the complete source for technical
support and information for Datalogic products. The site offers product support,
warranty information, product manuals, product tech notes, software updates, demos,
and instructions for returning products for repair.
Reseller Technical Support

An excellent source for technical assistance and information is an authorized
Datalogic reseller. A reseller is acquainted with specific types of businesses,
application software, and computer systems and can provide individualized
assistance.
Telephone Technical Support

If you do not have internet or email access, you may contact Datalogic technical
support at (541) 349-8283 or check the back cover of your manual for more contact
information.

Chapter 2
Site Preparation and Installation
This section provides instructions on preparation of the checkstand for scanner or
scanning-scale installation. It also specifies physical parameters, power and
ventilation considerations, cable routing information and unit installation.
The guidelines that follow, titled Checkstand Preparation, present specifics for models
available at the time of this writing.
Some models are designed to fit with little or no modification into openings cut for
previously installed scanners such as other MagellanTM scanners, or NCR® scanner
models 7874/5/6/7/8. Other models are designed for applications with smaller
footprint requirements. See Figure 7 for models available at the time of this printing.
Additionally, a Customer Service Scanner (CSS) module (Figure 7) can be optionally
included with a scanner for installation. The module can be installed in various
positions depending upon the checkstand design and desired mode(s) of customer
interaction. See the CSS Quick Reference Guide (QRG) for more details.
Once the procedures in this section are complete, the scanner is ready for operation,
excepting that if a scanning-scale was installed, calibration will be required before
placing the unit into operation. You must consult the local weights and measures
authority to ensure that all legal requirements are met concerning calibration and
certification. Section 6. Calibration Procedures, contains detailed procedures for
calibrating the scale in either pounds or kilograms.

Figure 7. Scanner and Scanner/Scale Models
Model 939401
Short Scanner Model 939403
Medium Scanner Model 939405
Long Scanner
Model 939404 Model 939406

Medium Long
Scanner/Scale Scanner/Scale
Pre-Installation Considerations
This manual does not cover all factors relating to worker safety and checkstand
design. It does, however, offer a list of considerations that may be helpful in ensuring
greater safety and productivity. Careful planning using these general guidelines
should result in a more efficient, comfortable work environment.
The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics reports that the incidence of repetitive motion
injuries has increased dramatically in recent years. Checkstand design and scanner
installation and operation procedures can reduce the risk of repetitive motion injuries,
but not eliminate it.
Although there are currently no formal guidelines for checkstand ergonomics, the
Food Marketing Institute (FMI), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
and the National Institute of Occupational Safety (NIOSH) of the Department of Health
and Human Services have released the reports listed at the end of these
recommendations. These reports contain useful suggestions for ergonomic
improvement of checkstand designs and scanner installation, maintenance and
usage. Portions of the reports are summarized below. For copies of the complete
reports, or to inquire about any modifications to the recommendations, contact FMI,
OSHA and NIOSH at the addresses listed at the end of these recommendations.

Checkstand Design Recommendations
1. Select a design which allows load-sharing by several muscle groups (for example
designs which allow the cashier to use both hands for scanning and bagging).
2. Use a powered in-feed conveyor to help cashiers bring the items to their best
work zone, rather than leaning and reaching to get items further up the con-
veyor.
3. Select checkstands which deliver products to the cashier on an input belt and do
not require the unloading of items from a cart. These designs put less stress on
the cashiers’ shoulders and back.
4. Minimize the distance between the input and take-away conveyors (i.e., the dis-
tance the cashier has to reach to move the products).
5. Minimize the width of the input conveyor to reduce the cashier’s reach to items
on the far side of the belt; use a diverter or “sweeper” to direct products closer to
the cashier.
6. Select a design which encourages the cashier to slide products across the scan-
ner rather than gripping and lifting. Make sure the horizontal surface of the
scanner is flush with all surrounding surfaces.
7. Choose a design which integrates the scanner and scale to eliminate extended
reaches and lifts during weighing tasks.
8. Place the conveyor belt electronic eye close to the scanner, but allow sufficient
area between the eye to ensure the belt does not push items in to the scanning
field.
9. Locate commonly used items such as the cash drawer and printer within easy
horizontal reach.
10. Remove, round-off, or pad sharp or hard edges with which the cashier may come
into contact.
11. Provide an easily accessible bag stand at a height 13 - 17 inches (33 - 43.2 cm)
lower than the top surface of the checkstand to reduce stresses to the shoul-
ders, elbows, and risks associated with lifting products into bags.
12. Do not position the bag stand between the cashier and the scanner, due to the
increased reach involved.
13. Position the scanner’s horizontal scanning surface 34 - 36 inches (86.4 - 91.4
cm) above the floor. Maintain a minimum of five inches (12.7 cm) clearance
between elbows and work surfaces.
14. Provide adjustable keyboard mounting (height, tilt, and horizontal reach).
15. Position the printer, cash drawer, and other checkstand devices the cashier uses
within easy reach (less than 18 inches/45.7 cm).

16. Provide adequate toe space (at least four inches), foot rests or rails, anti-fatigue
mats, and where feasible, an adjustable seat or stand against which the cashiers
can lean.
Scanner Installation
1. Mount the horizontal surface of the scanner flush with the countertop to
encourage slide scanning rather than lifting.
2. Position the centerline of the scanner read area 8 - 10 inches (20.3 - 25.4 cm)
from the edge of the checkstand (cashier side).
Scanner Maintenance
1. Keep scanner windows clean. This will improve productivity and reduce rescans.
2. Replace scanner glass when excessive scratches are evident.
References
U.S. Department of Labor
Guidelines for Retail Grocery Stores
www.osha.gov
Anonymous, 1992, “Ergonomic Improvement of Scanning Checkstand Designs”,

Food Marketing Institute
800 Connecticut Ave. N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006
Grant, Katharyn A. et al., 1992, “Ergonomic Evaluation of Checkstand Designs in the Retail Food
Industry”,
National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health
4676 Columbia Parkway
Cincinnati, Ohio 45226

Scanner Usage
1. Minimize handling of heavy/bulky products. Leave these items in the cart and
use an alternative entry method such as key entry of short PLUs, LaneHawk®
BOB (Bottom Of Basket) technology, or handheld scanning.
2. Regularly train cashiers in proper scanning methods and ergonomics principles,

such as:
- Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing work equally between
hands.
- Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items.
- Since the scanner reads labels on multiple sides, there should be no need to
particularly orient a bar code toward the scanner windows.
- Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster hand movements.
Simply slide the item across the scanner’s horizontal window with as little ori-
entation motion as necessary.
- Leave items in an upright position; do not lift and tilt.
- Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is located.
- Do not favor either the vertical or horizontal window; slide items across the
scanner in their natural orientations on the checkstand as much as possible.
Site Preparation Overview

Consider the following factors before installing the scanner/scanning-scale and its
optional Remote Scale Display.
Ventilation Requirements — The scanner operates without the use of a ventilation fan.
As long as there is adequate convective air flow and no major heat producing
equipment in close proximity, the unit’s housing provides adequate heat dissipation.
The air temperature in the checkstand around the scanner must not exceed 104°F
(40°C).
Service Access Requirements — Routine operations such as ‘zeroing’ and calibration do

not require removal of the scanner from the checkstand or disassembly of the
product. The installer should plan service access for the AC/DC Power Supply and
cables.
Recommended Power Installation — Since the typical grocery environment includes

conveyor belts and electric motors, care should be taken to ensure that the scanner
has a supply of “clean” power (power without excessive electrical noise).
Counter Preparation — Since the majority of grocery checkout lanes are designed as
“left-hand take away,” the counter drawings in this section focus on this counter
design. Simply reverse the layout for a “right-hand take away” requirement. The unit
scans equally well in either of these two configurations.
Liquid Drainage — Should a liquid spill occur, ensure that moisture can flow through the
checkstand without pooling.
Leveling — Plan ahead and provide screws/bolts in the checkstand mounts and a
leveling guide (board) to allow leveling of the scanner or scanning-scale within the

counter. Use a 0.375” thick board to replicate the mounting flange on the long scanner
or scanning-scale, and adjust screws or bolts until the board is flush within the
counter. Use a 4.0” wide board stood on its end to adjust leveling screws/bolts in rail
support applications.
Cable Routing — Placement of the scanning-scale should be planned to allow easy

access to other components as well as optimize communication between the scanner,
the POS terminal and the optional Remote Scale Display. Note that cables may drop
straight down from the scanner’s connector panel, or may be conveniently routed
along the unit’s side using the hardware provided. Do not route interface cables near
any electrical motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference.
Remote Scale Display Placement — The customer, and checker in some instances, must
be able to easily view and read the Remote Scale Display (if one is present). Ambient
light and mounting height considerations are discussed later in this section.
Vertical Clearance — Provision must be made to allow adequate space above the
scanner bonnet for removal and replacement of the All Weighs™ Platter (the L-shaped
platter). Optimal clearance permits the platter to be grasped at its top vertical edge
and lifted for removal without obstruction (such as a fixed keyboard mount or any
type of enclosure). Should such an enclosure be unavoidable, an alternate method of
platter removal using two coins may be employed, however a minimum vertical
clearance of 1.5” (3.8 cm) MUST be provided (reference Figure 8). Another
consideration is that the scan zone must be kept free of obstructions such as
enclosures, keyboard mounts, etc.
Figure 8. Vertical Clearance
DO NOT DO NOT
Obstruct Obstruct
Scan Zone L-Platter
Removal
Allow a minimum (Keyboard Mount)

clearance of
1.5" (3.8cm)
(Enclosure)

Display Clearance — Clearance must be allowed so that a POS display will not interfere
with the scanner’s read zones. POS display placement must not encroach the scan
zone formed by the horizontal and vertical windows. The bottom of the display must
be no lower than the 30° line shown in Figure 9, which projects from the front edge of
the bonnet, 6 cm above the weigh platter.
Figure 9. Display Clearance
D
I
S
P
L
A
~30° minimum
Y
128.8mm
Ventilation and Spacing

The scanning-scale’s perimeter housing has been designed to provide adequate space
for convective cooling and unrestricted movement of the weighing apparatus. Figure
10 shows the debris chutes and ventilation slots. The checkstand design must...
• keep the ambient air temperature inside the checkstand adjacent to the scanner
below 104°F (40°C).
• allow a source of air that provides adequate cooling by convective air flow.
DO NOT place the scanner in a close-fitting, fully enclosed checkstand. Provide a

MINIMUM of 16 square inches (103.2 square centimeters) of air intake from below
the installation for sufficient convective cooling.
NOTE
If motors, conveyor belts, or other heat producing equipment are located near the
scanner, forced air ventilation may be required. In most installations, a 30 cfm (.84
cmm) axial fan should provide sufficient air movement. If a ventilation fan is installed,
it is recommended to use one with a removable filter that may be washed or replaced.

Figure 10. Debris Chutes & Ventilation Slots
(Models vary)
Service Access
The scanner and scanning-scale have been engineered to allow performance of all
routine service and maintenance (such as “zeroing” and calibration) without removing
the scanner from the checkstand. Additionally all cable connections made at the
scanner can be connected and removed while the unit is sitting on the countertop.
The installer should provide service access to all remaining cable connectors as well
as the AC/DC Power Supply (if installed).
Power Installation
Plug your scanner into an electrical outlet that has been wired to meet all applicable
electrical codes, laws, and regulations and has a common ground with the Point-of-
Sale terminal.

Grounding
The AC/DC Power Supply should have an AC outlet with a clean earth ground. If you
are not sure how to verify the amount of electrical noise (interference) on the power
line, ask a qualified electrician to measure the input line voltage.
Checkstand Preparation
Reference Figure 11. When performing a first time installation into a new checkstand,
verify before cutting that room will be allowed for cabling and the AC/DC Power
Supply. When making the opening, take extra care to accurately cut to the correct
dimensions. Mounting may require installation of support(s), countertop routing, or
other such devices. Depending upon checkstand design, you may wish to install an
item diverter to direct items toward the scan window. See the instructions in this
manual titled “Counter Cutout” for more details concerning the location and
preparation of the opening.
Figure 11. Installation Overview
(M odels and
connections
vary) Counter Cutout
Item
Diverter
AC/ DC
Power Routed
Supply Suppor t
Cabling
Lip
Suppor t Rails
Liquid Spills and Moisture

Select a checkstand design which allows fluids to flow through, and directs liquids
away from any electronic equipment or storage areas.

Counter Cutout
The most important consideration when planning the counter opening for the scanner
is the operator’s comfortable reaching distance. The ideal, ergonomically sound
installation allows items to be directed within easy reach, and a scanning area
requiring no lifting or special orientation of items. If you haven’t already read the
information at the beginning of this section titled, Pre-Installation Considerations,
please do so before continuing these instructions.
The symmetrical design of the scanner permits the operator to easily pass items from
one hand to the other while scanning (either from right-to-left or left-to-right). With
the unique multi-side scan zone, scanning is accomplished in one fluid motion. The
operator simply slides the item from the conveyor belt or diverter area through the
scanning area and passes the item to the other hand, which in turn bags it or places it
on a take-away conveyor belt. Movement should flow naturally over the surface of
the scanner.
Note that the following guidelines for preparing an existing checkstand to accept a
scanner, or incorporating the unit into a new checkstand design will not be accurate
for all installations. Although these guidelines will suffice for most standard
installations, the installer may need to make adjustments for varying counter heights
and thicknesses, support design, or other checkstand limitations.
Figure 12 shows a typical “left-hand-take-away” checkstand design.
Follow these basic steps to install the unit:
1. Select a position for the scanner that offers a smooth product flow which best
accommodates the reaching distance of the average operator.
2. Cut the opening in the countertop. Select the appropriate drawing from Figure
14, or Figure 17 for your model.
3. Install the AC/DC Power Supply, the Remote Scale Display cable and the inter-
face cable(s) observing the following:
Interface cables (and display cable, if applicable) should be routed away from
all highly inductive electrical devices, like motors and conveyor belts, and even
away from the unit’s power cable if possible.
Cables should be easy to remove in the event that replacement is required. A lit-
tle planning now will save a lot of frustration later.
4. Connect and verify all system operations.

The scanner should be installed so that leading and trailing edges of the All Weighs™
Platter are flush with the countertop to enhance smooth, slide-through scanning
(reference Figure 13). Keep in mind that the debris chutes on both sides of the platter
provide the necessary clearance for proper scale operation if you are installing a
scanning-scale (you won’t need to provide an additional gap for that).

Figure 12. Typical Checkstand Design & Cutout Location
2 3
8
0.00 lb
CAPACITY / CAPACITE
- 30 X .01 lb / 15 x .005 kg
7
5
1 4 6
10 9
1 Conveyor 6 Optional Customer Service Scanner (CSS)

2 Remote Display 7 Bagging Area
3 POS Terminal and Printer 8 Bag Well
4 Keyboard 9 Check Writing Stand (optional)
5 Scanner or Scanning-Scale 10 Item Diverter (optional)

Figure 13. Mounting the Scanner Flush
Scanner Mounted Flush — Correct
Scanner Mounted Scanner Mounted

Below Flush — Incorrect Above Flush — Incorrect
Refer to the appropriate drawing for cut-out and dimensional information on the
model you’ll be installing:
Cutout Reference
Model Description
Dimensions Dimensions
939401 Short Shelf Mount Scanner Figure 14 Figure 15
939403 Medium Shelf Mount Scanner Figure 16 Figure 17
Medium Shelf Mount Scanning-
939404 Figure 16 Figure 17
scale
939405 Long Flange Mount Scanner Figure 18 Figure 19
Long Flange Mount Scanning-
939406 Figure 18 Figure 19
Scale

Figure 14. Model 939401 (Short Scanner Model) Cutout Dimensions
Model 939401 (Short) Max. Radius = 0.635cm

Minimum Cutout (0.25") 4x
Dimensions 35.6cm
(14.00")
min. 29.53cm
(11.625")
min.
Model 939401 (Short)

103.6mm (4.08")
Supports
Liquid
Drainage Liquid
Drainage
Support Rails
Figure 15. Model 939401 (Short Scanner Model) Reference Dimensions
117.9mm (4.64”)
Model 939401
Reference
Dimensions Window 128.8mm
(5.07”)
103.3mm 100.5mm
(4.06”) (3.95”)
121.1mm (4.76”)
292.1mm (11.5”)
6.03 kg
(13.3 lb)
Scanner Weight
(no scale)
351.9mm (13.85”)

Figure 16. Models 939403 and 939404 (Medium Scanner or Scanning-Scale) Cutout Dimensions
Models 939403 and 939404 (Medium Shelf)

Minimum Cutout
Dimensions Max. Radius = 0.25"
(0.635cm) 4x
15.825"
(40.2cm)
min. 11.625"
(29.53cm)
min.
Models 939403 and 939404 (Medium Shelf) Supports

103.6mm (4.07")
Liquid Liquid
Support Rails Drainage Drainage
Figure 17. Models 939403 and 939404 (Medium Scanner or Scanning-Scale) Reference Dimensions
117.9mm (4.64”)
128.8mm
(5.07”)
103.6m 100.5mm
(4.07”) (3.95”)
168.2mm (6.62”) 292.1mm(11.5”)
7.39 kg 6.12 kg
Model 939403 (16.3 lb) (13.5 lb)
& Model 939404
Reference Scanner/Scale Scanner
Weight Weight (w/o scale)
Dimensions
399mm (15.7”)

Figure 18. Models 939405 and 939406 Long Scanner or Scanning-Scale Reference Dimensions
Model 939405
51.12cm
& Model 939406 Max. Radius = 0.635cm (20.125")
Cutout (0.25") 4x 47.308cm Rail
(18.625")
7.77 ±0.15 cm
(3.06" ± .006")
1.905cm 29.53cm
(0.75") (11.625")
(Center Line)
Rail
If leveling feet are needed 1.905cm 7.77 ±0.15 cm

for models 93/9405 and 93/9406, (0.75") (3.06" ± .006")
use the placement shown here, 0.952 ±0.07 cm 0.952 ±0.07 cm
represented with plus signs (+). (0.375" ± .030") (0.375" ± .030")
Model 939405
& Model 939406
Supports 51.12 ± 0.15 cm
(20.125" ± 0.06") 3.8 cm
1.9 cm (1.5")
0.95 ± 0.08 cm (0.375" ± 0.03")
(0.75")
1.9 ±0.15 cm 1.9 ±0.15 cm

(0.75"± .060") 47.3 ±0.15 cm (0.75"± .060") Liquid Drainage
Liquid (18.625" ± .060") 10.2 cm (4.0")
Drainage
Figure 19. Models 939405 and 939406 Long Scanner or Scanning-Scale Reference Dimensions
435mm (17.126”)
117.86mm (4.64”)
Window 128.68mm
(5.06”)
103.6mm 90.8mm 100.6mm

(4.08”) (3.57”) (3.96”)
34.9mm (1.37”) 44.7mm 292.1mm

(1.76”) (11.5”)
265.01mm (10.43”)
7.53 kg 6.27 kg
Model 939405 (16.6 lb) (13.82 lb)
& Model 939406
Reference Scanner/Scale Scanner
505.8mm (19.913”)
Dimensions Weight Weight (w/o scale)

Checkstand Mounting
There are a number of things to take into account when installing the unit into a
checkstand. Key factors are ergonomic/worker safety, loading capacity and stability.
Don’t forget to add the scanner or scanning-scale’s weight when calculating materials
and supports needed to construct a sturdy installation, as well as maximum capacity
of weighed and scanned items.
If you choose to rout a countertop with a thickness of 0.75” (1.9 cm) plywood, you’ll
need to add a backing strip that supports the area routed out for the support
flanges (see Figure 11). This support strip should minimally be made of 0.75” (1.9
cm) thick plywood and be approximately 4.0” (10.2 cm) wide and 14.0” (35.6 cm)
NOTE long. This strip should be glued as well as screwed to the underside of the counter-
top.
Installation Overview
The preceding Site Preparation Overview dealt with installed location and counter
preparations to accommodate the scanner or scanning-scale. Having completed
those steps, physical installation of the scanner or scanning-scale can begin. The
following instructions apply to all models.
This section describes:
1. Unpacking the unit.
2. Verifying operation before connecting to a POS system.
3. Routing and connecting cables.
4. Validating that your scanner communication parameters match the POS termi-
nal’s system requirements.
5. Confirming connection to the EAS system.
6. Functional testing to verify operation when connected to the POS system.

The following text describes each of these steps.

Unpacking
To unpack the unit:
• Inspect the package for signs of damage that may have occurred during ship-
ping. If damage is found, report it to your carrier immediately.
• Lift out the accessory box containing the AC/DC Power Supply, optional Remote
Scale Display and cable (if present), and the Quick Reference Guide.
• Remove the Quick Reference Guide and familiarize yourself with the unit’s con-
trols and features. Leave the guide at the checkstand when the installation is
complete.
• Remove the protective packing and carefully lift the unit from the carton. Be sure
to save the box and all packing material. In the event of failure, the unit must be returned
to the factory in its original packaging.
• Carefully lift off the All Weighs™ Platter as shown in Figure 30 and remove the
protective foam pieces securing the weigh mechanism. Set the platter back in
place.
For added protection during shipment, the All Weighs™ Platter is covered with a
tight-fitting layer of vinyl as shown in Figure 20. This vinyl layer MUST BE
REMOVED before placing the unit into service.
NOTE Also, if the unit is equipped with a scale, the scale spacer (below the platter) must
be removed prior to use.
Figure 20. Remove Protective Packaging
Protective vinyl
MUST be removed
from the platter
before use.
Foam Spacer
MUST be removed
(Models vary)
from beneath the
platter before use.
• Proceed to the Operational Verification instructions below.

Operational Verification
Follow these steps to ensure that your unit has arrived undamaged and is fully
functional before installing it in the counter and connecting it to your POS system.
1. If the unit is a scanning-scale, connect the Remote Scale Display to the proper
connector on the unit’s connector panel (refer to Figure 25).
if the Remote Scale Display is not connected, a scanner power-up Selftest will
sound a long, low beep, and the number “8” will appear on the Health & Status Indi-
cator (see Figure 21) indicating a remote display error. Power-down, connect a
known-good Remote Display to the appropriate port, and restart to correct this
NOTE problem. Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using programming bar
codes (see Section 7. Programming, for more information).
Figure 21. Viewing the Health & Status Indicator
Health & Status Indicator
2. Connect the power cable, first at the scanner, then at the AC outlet.
When power is applied to the unit, the normal indicator sequence is:
• The good read indicator LEDs will be lit (dim) steadily.
• [EAS models ONLY] The EAS indicator LED will flash ON/OFF during power-
up.
• Additionally, the Health & Status Indicator will flash the number ‘9’, indicating
the EAS system is being initialized.
If the Selftest detects a problem, the Health & Status Indicator will display a num-
ber code. Refer to Section 5. Problem Isolation, for a description of failure codes and
problem isolation procedures.
CAUTION

On rare occasions, performance of scale calibration may be necessary to obtain a
zero reading on the display.
NOTE
3. The unit should be permitted to reach thermal equilibrium before proceeding to

the next steps. (Reference the topic Warm-Up Time in Chapter 1.) When the unit
is moved from a cooler temperature (such as a storage area) to a warmer envi-
ronment (such as a checkstand location), a period of 60 minutes must be allowed
to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions. Once installed and powered up, a
“power-up” warm-up period of 15 minutes must be allowed before calibrating or
performing weighing operations. These two warm-up periods may run concur-
rently.
4. Verify that the scanner or scanning-scale passes an operational test by observ-

ing the following:
Scanner — Pass UPC/EAN bar code labels in front of the scanner’s windows. Since the
interface cable is not yet connected to the POS terminal, the scanner may be lim-
ited to reading only one or two labels (see the note that follows). The scanner
indicates when each label has been successfully read by flashing the green
scanner light and emitting a good read tone (beep).
When not connected to the host, the scanner may be limited to reading only one or
two labels. (This limitation is dependent upon the interface type.) To scan multiple
labels without connecting to the host, place the unit in Scanner Diagnostic Mode by
pressing the Scanner Control Button for four seconds.
NOTE
EAS System — The way in which EAS tags are deactivated is dependent upon the way
the scanner is currently programmed with regard to EAS Mode. (See “EAS Mode”
on page 158.) To test EAS system function...
• Coupled Mode — Pass an item containing both a bar code and an active EAS tag
over the scanner. Successful deactivation is indicated by the bottom-most LED
flashing first red, then orange, then returning to green. The beeper will sound a
good read beep.
If you have enabled the manual deactivation function available for Coupled Mode
(see “Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button” on page 52), test the function by
pressing the bottom push button. A ticking sound will be heard which should
cease upon deactivating an EAS tag.
• Decoupled Mode — In this mode, items do not require a bar code to be scanned
to arm the deactivation function. Simply pass an active EAS tag over the scanner
in the same direction you would scan a bar code. The bottom-most LED will flash
red to indicate deactivation. No beep is sounded to indicate deactivation in this
mode.
• Hybrid Mode — In Hybrid Mode, the scanner must be enabled, however EAS
deactivation in this mode also takes place without needing to scan an item’s bar
code. Pass an active EAS tag over the scanner in the same direction you would
scan a bar code. The bottom-most LED will flash red, then orange, then return to
green. The beeper may be configured to sound a high frequency beep to
announce successful deactivation.

Scale — If the yellow scale indicator LED is not lit, press the Scale Zero Button
momentarily. If the scale is operating correctly, the yellow LED will illuminate
and remain on steady, and the display will show a reading of 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for
metric). If the display is blank or a -0- is displayed, it may be necessary to
calibrate the scale before continuing. Refer to "Calibrating the Scale (Pounds &
Kilograms)" starting on page 78, for calibration procedures.
Remote Scale Display — Check to verify that 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric) is displayed,
then place an item on the weighing platter. Verify that the display shows a
weight and that the yellow LED goes out. Remove the item and observe that
Remote Scale Display shows 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric) and that the yellow LED
is On.
5. Unplug the AC power cord from the outlet and disconnect the power cord and
Remote Scale Display cable from the scanner’s connector panel.
After you have verified that the scanner and scale (if present) are completely
functional, continue with the following procedures to complete the installation.
Diagnostic Modes
Two diagnostic modes are available which allow you to initiate scanner or scale
diagnostic tests, as well as verify the scanner’s ability to read bar codes. Diagnostic
messages will be displayed on the Health & Status Indicator for both modes.
Scanner Diagnostic Mode

While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, continuous scanning of labels is allowed,
permitting the user to scan an unlimited number of bar codes while troubleshooting
problems. Under normal operation, the scanner stores label data, awaiting the signal
which transmits it to the host. When the scanner is not connected to a host, it may
read and store only up to two labels, then quit reading until power is cycled (clearing
the memory). This mode of operation removes this limitation.
To place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, press the Scanner Control Button
for five to nine seconds. While pressing the button, the scanner will first sound three
tones, wait a few seconds, then sound six rapid tones; after which you should
immediately release the button. For more details about the Scanner Control Button
and audio indications, see Appendix A, LED/Audio Indications & Controls.
While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, identification numbers for interface1 type,
firmware and configuration will scroll continually across the scanner’s Health &
Status Indicator (Field Replaceable Unit) display. This is useful information for field
diagnostics. See Figure 38 for the location of the display. For example, if the dual cable
RS-232 interface (type 05) were enabled, the firmware designation was R96-1234, and
the configuration was R96-5593, the following would be shown (slowly, with blanking
between each of the items)
IF-05 r96-1234 r96-5593.
To exit Scanner Diagnostic Mode, cycle power to the unit or press and hold the
Scanner Control Button for ten seconds to reset the scanner. See the topic, Scanner
and Scale Reset in Chapter 3 for more information about unit resets.
1. A listing of scanner interface identification numbers is available in Chapter 11, under the topic, Interface Type.

Scale Diagnostic Mode
The scanner must be configured to allow Scale Diagnostic Mode. See the Program-
ming section for details.
NOTE
To enter Scale Diagnostic Mode, press the Scale Service Button (this is the same
button as ScaleSentry) for approximately four seconds. Six rapid tones will be
sounded, indicating the unit is leaving normal operation and entering Scale Diagnostic
Mode.
Health & Status Scale Diagnostics

Upon entering Scale Diagnostics, the Health & Status indicator1 will then sound one
medium length beep and display a sequence of characters indicating the following
information:
Table 3. Scale Diagnostic Health & Status Indications

CHARACTERS EXPLANATION OF INDICATION
cx Where x is the number of calibrations performed to the scale.

x
x Where x indicates the number of times the scale has been zeroed.
x Where x indicates the scale gravity zone.
- xxxx Where xxxx is the load cell software checksum in hex lower 4 characters.
-x Where x indicates the scale software revision.
xxxx Data area reserved.
zzzz zzzz Scale weighing package identifier and signal processing identifier if present.
ucustomdata Is the value of a custom data string (if present — no data may be displayed if
the item value is not set.
The sequence will be repeated
H Upon successful completion, the scanner will automatically reset, displaying

an H.
If the diagnostics routine is not completed successfully, the scanner will sound a
series of tones and the Health & Status indicator will show an error code. Turn to
Chapter 5, Problem Isolation for a description of error codes.
Press the Scale Zero Button once more to reset the unit and exit Scale Diagnostic
Mode. See the topic, Scanner and Scale Reset in Chapter 3 for more information about
unit resets.
1. The Remote Display (if one is present) can additionally display some scale diagnostic information.

Optional Remote Display Scale Diagnostics Indications

If your unit is equipped with an optional Remote Display, it will show the following
sequence, with each character being separated by a500ms or greater blank time on
the display (for ease of reading). This display continues to scroll across the display
until the scanner changes state or is reset.
Table 4. Scale Diagnostic Remote Display Indications

CHARACTERS EXPLANATION OF INDICATION
PASS or ERRx Where x is 1 through 5.
All segments on the display are illuminated.
x Where x indicates the number of scale zeroing attempts.
cx Where xx represents the number of calibrations, with a maximum of 999 dis-

played.
—x Where x indicates the scale gravity zone.
xxxx Where xxxx is the load cell software checksum in hex lower 4 characters.
Cables & Connections

Considerations when routing the power and interface cables for the scanner and
scanning-scale are:
• Ensure that cables are not pinched, kinked or pierced.
• Do not route interface cables in close proximity to electrical motors or other
sources of electromagnetic interference.
• Cables can drop directly from their connectors on the scanner, or, alternatively,
can be routed along the scanner’s side to the back (see Figure 22).
Do not plug the AC power cord into the outlet at this time. It is a good practice to
always connect the power cable to the scanner first before plugging it into the AC
receptacle. The procedures titled, Set-Up, provided later in this section will instruct
you to connect the power cord at that time. Figure 22 illustrates the basic cable
routing scheme.

Figure 22. Cable Routing
POS Terminal, Printer &
Keyboard Remote Cash Drawer
Display
Scanner
(Models vary)
AC Power
Switch Remote Scale
(recommended) Display Cable Scanner
(optional Interface
AC/DC Scanner/Scale) Cable
Power
Supply Scale
Sensormatic EAS
Interface
Models ONLY Cable
EAS Antenna Cable (Scanner/Scale)
AC Power EAS Controller Box Optional
EAS
Interface Cable
Figure 23 provides physical dimensions for the AC/DC Adapter.

Figure 23. Physical Measurements: AC/DC Adapter
1.23"
5"
(3.1 cm) 3 .3 m )
c
1 .9 7 " (8 .5
(5 c m )

Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation

When installing the optional Remote Scale Display, consider both the customer’s
viewing angle and the amount of daily ambient light conditions anticipated at this
installation site. Figure 24 shows available adjustment for the display head.
Lighting Considerations
The display(s) will be easily readable unless placed in direct sunlight or other very
strong light sources. Light interference will not be a factor in most installations. For
best viewing, the display head(s) can each be rotated up to 180º around the post and/
or tilted 15º backward or forward.
Viewing Angle
The optimum display angle is directly facing the viewer. Tilt and rotation adjustments
can be made for the Remote Display models as shown in Figure 24. To ensure that
displays are easily readable for customers/cashiers of average height, display heads
should be between 48” to 60” (122 to 152 cm) from the floor.
Check with local Weights and Measures authorities regarding proper posi-
tioning of scale displays used in retail trade.
NOTE
Figure 24. Modular/Adjustable Remote Scale Display
15° 15°
15°
Upward or
Dual Display Downward Tilt
Heads
180°
Rotation
Single Display
Head
180°
Rotation

Remote Display Cabling
Your installation should also take into account the routing of Remote Display cabling.
Ensure that distance and obstacles spanned by the routed cable will not kink, pinch or
stretch it. Also keep in mind you may need to drill a hole through which to route it.
The Remote Scale Display connector end may be secured with a rubber
band during shipping to prevent damage to the “locking tabs”. After rout-
ing the cable, remove this rubber band before connecting. Failure to
remove the band will keep the connector from latching properly.
NOTE
Placing and Installing the Remote Display

Reference Figure 26 while performing these procedures.
1. Determine where you want to install the Remote Scale Display based on your
counter design, the viewing angle, lighting considerations and cable routing dis-
cussed previously. Reference Figure 25 for the display’s physical dimensions.
Optimally, the display(s) should be approximately eye level to the viewer(s).
2. Use the template provided in Figure 27 to mark locations of the mounting screw
and cable routing holes.
• The mounting screw holes are on 3-1/2” (85.1 mm) centers. The cable can either
be routed through a 3/4” (19 mm) diameter hole directly under the mounting
base or through the cutout in the back of the base (see Figure 26).
3. Drill the mounting screw holes using a drill bit of the appropriate diameter for
your mounting screws or bolts.
4. Drill the cable routing hole using a 3/4” (19 mm) drill bit (optional).
Figure 25. Remote Display Physical Measurements
18.5mm
Dual Display Single Display

28.4mm
60mm 60mm
112mm 112mm
329mm
264mm
292.5mm
325mm 227.5mm
116.39mm 116.39mm
25.5mm
41.99mm
85.1mm

5. Feed the entire length of the Remote Scale Display interface cable through the
cable routing hole so that the assembled Remote Scale Display can be posi-
tioned over the mounting screw holes.
6. If present, remove the rubber band from the connector end.
7. Install mounting screws or bolts to complete the installation of the Remote

Scale Display. Take care not to pinch or pierce the interface cable while securing
the Remote Scale Display to the checkstand.
Figure 26. Remote Scale Display Mounting
Mounting
Example
Dual Display
(29cm)
Heads
11.5"
(61cm)
24"
(122 - 152cm)
48 - 60"
(91cm)
36"
Single
Display
Head
(optional
cable
routing)
Figure 27. Remote Scale Display Mounting Template
116.39mm
41.99mm
85.1mm 25.5mm

Changing Weighing Modes
Your scanning-scale has been programmed for weighing in either pounds or
kilograms depending upon the initial operating environment that was specified when
you ordered your scanning-scale. If you need to change from pounds to kilograms or
vice-versa, call Technical Support.
You can verify that the scale is set correctly for your country’s requirements by
observing that the Remote Scale Display shows the appropriate measurement
symbol (lb or kg) when the power-up Selftest is completed.
Any time the scale weighing mode is changed, the scale must be re-
LEGAL NOTE calibrated before commercial use.
Set-Up & Installation

These setup and installation procedures assume that you have already prepared your
checkstand to receive the scanner or scanning-scale. If you have not already made
the counter cutout and routed power and interface cables, do so now as described in
the previous instructions. If your checkstand has been prepared, proceed as follows:
Set-up
1. Place the unit on the checkstand next to the counter cutout.
2. Route the cables up through the cutout and connect the scanner and scale inter-
face cable(s), and Remote Scale Display cable (optional) to the scanner. Some
POS terminals require two interface cables; one for the scanner interface and
one for the scale interface. Refer to Figure 28 for cable connection locations. The
appearance of the connector panel will vary depending upon the factory options
purchased with your model.
If you have a scanner with no scale, there will be only one interface cable to the POS
terminal.
3. Connect the power cord to the scanner and route the other end down through
the checkstand to the AC power outlet. DO NOT plug the power cord in at this
time.
4. OPTIONAL — Route your EAS antenna cable down through the checkstand cut-
out. (Reference your EAS controller’s set-up instructions for proper EAS antenna
installation.)

Figure 28. Connecting Cables to the Scanner/Scale
AUXILIARY PORT EAS SCALE HOST HOST PORT

· Application Download · Provides Good Read Scale Data (dual · Label Data
to attached RS-232 output to enable EAS cable scanner/scale) · Scale Data (for
Handheld Scanner antenna RF output single cable interfaces)
· Application Download
(where appropriate)
Connection to Connection to Dual cable units only.

this port is this port is (Scale connection may
Optional Optional be handled through
POS Terminal port)

AUX EAS HOST
PORT
Connector Bulkhead
AUX EAS HOST
PORT
USB PORTS REMOTE DISPLAY POWER USB ‘B’ IMAGE PORT

· USB Handheld Drives Remote Display AC Brick Input · Connects to archive
Scanner Input OR drive or other device
· USB-to-Serial adapter Power off Terminal for saving captured
used for scale cali- (POT) Brick Input image files.
bration testing.
Connection to Models with scale Connection to

these ports is only this port is
Optional Optional

Figure 29. Optional EAS Cable Connections
To Checkpoint® To Sensormatic®
or Nedap® EAS System EAS System
5. Make sure that all cables are firmly attached (except that the AC/DC power sup-
ply should not be connected to the AC outlet yet).
6. Remove the All Weighs™ Platter to gain access to the lift handles. Lift the top
edge of the platter bezel as shown in Figure 30 and gently lift it from the scan-
ner. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you may find it easier to grasp edges
of the platter as shown by the arrows.
Figure 30. Removing the All Weighs™ Platter
7. The scanner provides lift handles that must be rotated up into position for use
as shown in Figure 31. When released, these handles should be allowed to
rotate back down into their seated positions in the cavity. Use reasonable care
when attempting to lift the unit using any features other than the lift handles.

Figure 31. Using the Lift Handles
OK OK NO
Bubble Level
8. Lower the unit into the counter opening, ensuring that none of the cables are
pinched, pierced or crimped.
9. View the bubble level (if present1) located on the scanner's spider assembly to
ensure the scanner is level. As shown in the insert of Figure 30, the air bubble
should appear fully within the circle indicated. The air bubble can touch the circle,
but must not overlap it. Apply shims beneath the scanner flange or adjust the
leveling feet to allow level installation.
10. Reinstall the All Weighs™ Platter and verify that it is flush or just below flush
with the countertop. This is necessary to provide smooth scanning from either
direction. Make adjustments as needed to align the platter with the counter by
moving support rails up or down, or consider installing screws in positions that
will allow their use in adjusting the unit’s position. Ensure that leveling is main-
tained if adjustments are made.
Failure to install a scanning-scale in a stable and level position will inhibit weigh-
ing, calibration and zeroing operations. The platter MUST make unobstructed con-
tact with all of its supports for proper weighing operation.
NOTE
11. Once installation is complete, proceed with the Operational Verification proce-
dures that follow.
1. The bubble level is present only on certain models.

System Power-Up Recap
The System Power-Up procedure may vary depending upon the requirements of your
POS system. It is generally a good practice to power-down (switch off) all equipment
prior to connecting cables. Check with your System Supervisor and/or refer to your
POS terminal manual for proper power-down and power-up procedures and interface
requirements when connecting any peripheral device.
If you have not identified any specific requirements for your POS system, follow these
steps.
1. Power-down the POS terminal.
2. Ensure that power is disconnected from the scanner.
3. Connect the scanner and scale interface cables to your POS terminal. This con-
nection may use one or two cables depending upon your POS terminal interface.
4. Connect the Remote Display cable if your model is a scanning-scale and make
any connections to optional equipment, such as EAS1 or a handheld scanner.
5. Power-up the scanner or scanning-scale by connecting the power cord to an AC

power outlet. Wait for the unit to complete the Selftest routine (10 seconds
maximum).
6. Power-up the POS terminal.
7. Verify that both scanning and weighing data are properly communicated
between the scanner and your POS system. (Weigh, deactivate2 and scan a few
items.) If problems are encountered, refer to Chapter 5, Problem Isolation.
8. You have now completed installation and system integration of the scanner or
scanning-scale. At this point, the scale must be calibrated and certified in accor-
dance with the requirements of your state and/or local requirements. Refer to
Section 6. Calibration Procedures for calibration details.
1. Some peripheral equipment must be connected or powered on in a specific order. Check the equipment instructions to verify
the correct sequence.
2. Test EAS deactivation only if applicable for your model.

NOTES

Chapter 3
Operation and Maintenance
The information contained in this section describes how to operate and maintain the
scanner, scale and EAS system. Topics include “how to’s” on scanning, EAS tag
deactivation, weighing, re-zeroing the scale, removing the top cover and cleaning the
upper and lower windows.
Scanning Items
To scan items, slide or push them over the scanner as shown in Figure 32. Also see
Figure 4 for views showing the scan zone. The scanner will work equally well with
either a left-to-right or right-to-left motion through the scan zone. There is no need
to reorient an item’s bar code since the scanner can read the left, right, front and back
side, as well as the bottom of an item.
“Limited Scanning Mode” is entered by default by interfaces such as USB and IBM
until a Point Of Sale (POS) terminal enables scanning. Labels are “chirped” while in this
mode.
NOTE
Figure 32. Scanning an Item

Proper Scanning Technique

The scanner was designed to provide the ultimate in ergonomic enhancements for
Point-Of-Sale (POS) scanning. To take advantage of these advancements:
Practice the techniques below to improve scanning efficiency:
• Move the product across the horizontal window (See Figure 32).
• Since the scanner reads labels on all four sides plus the top and bottom, don’t
favor either the horizontal or vertical scan windows. Keep items in their natural
orientation.
• Remember to slide or push items rather than picking them up. By avoiding any
gripping, twisting and rotation of your hands and wrists, you can prevent repeti-
tive motion injuries. This technique also relieves you from lifting possibly thou-
sands of pounds per day.
• Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing work equally between
hands.
• Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items.
• Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster hand movements.
• Learn typical locations for bar codes on packages; avoid “flipping” or rotating the
items during scanning.
• Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is located.
Proper Weighing Technique (Scale Models)

1. The L-shaped All-WeighsTM platter allows you to place items anywhere on its
surface, including leaning against its vertical section, to be weighed accurately.
The raised lip on the end also provides a convenient way to ensure items do not
rest on the counter or other non-weighing surfaces. (Reference Figure 33a.)
It is important that items rest entirely on the platter for their full weight to be accu-
rately recorded. An optional ScaleSentryTM feature can be employed to help pre-
vent the occurrence of item overlap onto non-weighing surfaces. See the following
section for more information about this feature.
NOTE
Figure 33. L-Shaped Platter, Item Placement and ScaleSentryTM

ScaleSentryTM
Beams
a b
2. Once weighed items are in place, enter PLU (price Look-Up) data as described in
your POS system instructions. Item weight is displayed on the Remote Display
and/or the host display.

3. Remove the item from the weigh platter.
Using the Optional ScaleSentryTM Feature

If the scanning-scale has been equipped with ScaleSentryTM, infrared (IR) beam(s) are
emitted along one or both long edges of the platter (See Figure 33b). During the
process when items are being weighed, if an item approaches too closely or extends
past the edges of the weighing surface, this is detected by the IR beam(s) and the
scanner will indicate a ScaleSentry event by illuminating its ScaleSentry indicator LED
and/or sounding a special ScaleSentry tone. These indications are configurable, and
can be enabled or disabled using the Programming section of this manual.
Depending upon how ScaleSentry is configured, a scale transaction cannot be
completed until: 1) The item(s) are physically repositioned to rest fully on the platter
without overhanging the side, or until 2) The ScaleSentry button is pushed, overriding
the condition, or 3) It can also be configured to only indicate the error, but still transmit
the weight to the POS.
Deactivating Security Labels

Two different types of Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) systems can be
optionally enabled for certain scanner models. Your system may or may not
be equipped with EAS deactivation functionality.
NOTE
Checkpoint and Nedap

Checkpoint® and Nedap® systems require a wired connection as shown in Figure 2.
When this system is armed, Checkpoint or Nedap EAS-tagged items are automatically
deactivated as they are slid over the scanner’s platter area during scanning.
Sensormatic
Sensormatic® Ultra-Max®, Ultra-Strip® II and III EAS tags can be detected and
deactivated by a system that is equipped to do so. This is accomplished by means of a
deactivation antenna mounted under the scanner platter. EAS tags should be brought
within five inches of the antenna to be deactivated.
EAS Deactivation Modes

Three modes of initiating deactivation are selectable via scanner programming
(reference Chapter 10, "EAS Mode" in this manual):
• Coupled Mode — Deactivation occurs only after item bar codes are read by the
scanner.
• Decoupled Mode — Deactivation is independent of the scanning function
• Hybrid Mode — The EAS system is armed whenever the scanner is enabled and
the deactivation beep is sounded when an EAS tag is deactivated..
The EAS system must be functional to implement any of the EAS Modes. If
the EAS system is not active, error code 9 will be displayed in the Health &
Status Indicator (see Figure 40).
NOTE

EAS Deactivation Indicators

The scanner can be programmed to beep in acknowledgment of deactivation or upon
deactivation failure. Additionally, the tri-color indicator (the bottom-most LED)
displays deactivation status. (For more information about Beeper and LED indications,
see the LED/Audio Indications & Controls section of this manual. Also reference the
programming section for their configurable features.) By general default, LED
indications are:
• Green means the system is ready (standing by).
• Red signifies the system has detected an EAS tag.
• Orange indicates an EAS tag is being deactivated.
Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button

The bottom-most push button is reserved for use in rare instances where EAS tagged
items are not automatically deactivated when brought through the scan zone. This
button is not intended for regular use. In instances where deactivation is not
automatically triggered, hold the EAS tag directly downstream from the horizontal
window, and press and release the Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button. This
manual deactivation feature is optional, and can be enabled/disabled via the bar
codes located in the programming section of this manual.
The item will be deactivated and a message to store management that this has
occurred will be sent.
In a case where an item’s bar code is damaged or obscured by an EAS tag or

other obstruction, the operator will need to key enter the bar code number
and use the Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button to manually deactivate the
EAS tag.
NOTE
Deactivating the EAS System when failed

In cases of EAS system failure or malfunction, a scanner can be enabled to operate
independent of the EAS deactivation function. This is accomplished by pressing and
holding the EAS Manual Deactivation Push Button for three seconds. The scanner will
sound three high-pitched beeps upon bypassing the EAS function in this manner.
When in this state, the scanner’s EAS LED will flash slowly red, as well as the FRU
Status LED, which will slowly flash error nine (9).
Operational Controls
The function of scanner and scale controls and indicators is listed in Appendix A, LED/
Audio Indications & Controls. Turn to that appendix for full details.
Operational Modes
The scanner or scanner/scale features a number of modes that are important to both
the user and the system support personnel. These modes can be combined into three
groups: pre-operational, operational, and additional functions. The following text
describes these modes, what they mean, and how and when they are seen.

Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation
Pre-Operation describes those steps that must be successfully completed before the
scanner sounds the initial good read tone and illuminates the lamps indicating the
scanner and/or scale are ready for operation. These steps include Power-Up Selftest,
Error Reporting, and Operational Configuration.
Power-Up/Selftest
Power-Up Selftest begins when power is applied. The scanner’s software immediately
begins the testing sequence to verify that all systems are functioning properly. This
routine, which only takes a few seconds, checks all the functions of the scanner, EAS
deactivation system, scale, remote scale display and interface prior to indicating that
it is ready for operation.
A tone indicating Selftest is complete is a configurable feature. See Chapter

9, "Power-up Tone Control" in this manual.
NOTE
Error Reporting
If a fatal error is detected during Selftest or operation, the unit will not advance to
Normal Operation Mode. Selftest diagnostics will cause the unit to sound a long, low
tone and/or display an error message on the Health & Status Indicator indicating
where the failure occurred. These messages are coded to assist the repair technician
in identifying the failed component. If the error is with the EAS deactivation system,
the bottom-most LED will flash red. If an error is indicated, make note of it and
contact your supervisor or technical support representative. A table containing
descriptions of these error codes is included in Chapter 5, Problem Isolation.
If a non-fatal1 error is detected (such as a EAS deactivation system error), the unit will
sound a long, low tone and display a number on the Health & Status Indicator. The
unit will advance to Normal Operating Mode, but performance may be affected until a
correction or repair is made.
Operational Configuration
Once Selftest diagnostics have been successfully run, a tone is emitted (if configured
to do so, and the unit enters an operational configuration state. The scanner or
scanner/scale will automatically load your specific interface settings which are
required to communicate with the host system. There are two conditions that must
be met before the unit can enter Operating Mode:
• No bar code label can be in the scan volume while the unit is in this state. Prog-
ress is halted until the label has been removed, thereby ensuring that no extra-
neous bar code data is sent to the host.
• If your scanner has a scale, the scale cannot be in motion (usually caused by
excessive vibration in the checkstand) for this test to succeed. A “Scale in
Motion” status will be indicated by displaying a period and the applicable weight
unit (lb . lb or kg . kg ) that is selected.
1. Scanner behavior under non-fatal error conditions is configurable. See Chapter 7, Programming for more details.

• The scale must be able to “capture” zero weight. The -0- display will be
seen if there is a weight on the platter at power-up. Removing the weight or
pressing the Sscale Zero Button should allow the scale to find zero.
• When the scanner or scanner/scale completes its Selftest successfully, it emits
a tone (when configured to do so) and enters Operating Mode.
Operating Mode
Operating Mode includes Normal Operation (scanning, EAS deactivation and weighing)
and Sleep Mode. These two modes are most commonly observed by the user/
operator.
Normal Operation
This condition is indicated by the scanner green LED and the EAS deactivation LED
both being on dim and steady. For scanner/scale models, the scale yellow LED
indicates that the scale senses a weight of zero on the platter. If you have a scanner
without scale model, the yellow lamp will not be lit when the scanner is ready for
scanning.
Yellow and Green LED indications are configurable. Your scanner may not be
programmed to operate in the standard manner described above.
NOTE
Once the scanner enters Normal Operation, it begins a countdown sequence. If there
is no activity during a preset period of time (also called time-out1), the unit will shut
off in order to prolong the life of the optical components. Once the scanner has timed
out, it enters Sleep Mode.
Sleep Mode
After the scanner has been left idle for a preset period of time, the unit goes to sleep.
This state is called Sleep Mode, and is indicated by a “slow” blink of the green light
(blinking at a 2-second rate). To wake up the unit, press anywhere on the weigh
platter (scanner/scale models only), press the Volume Selection switch or wave your
hand in front of the vertical window. The unit will recognize any of these signals as a
wake-up call and instantly return to Normal Operation.
1. “Timeout” and “Sleep Mode” time delays are programmable features that can be selected through use of the programming
labels included in Chapter 7, Programming.

Additional Functions
Additional scanner and scale functions include programming, running scanner or
scale diagnostics, initiating a reset, zeroing the scale, and calibrating the scale.
Programming
When your scanner or scanner/scale is shipped from the factory it is configured to
work with the POS system interface at your store and read the bar code symbologies
you designated. If you need to change this configuration information for any reason,
Chapter 7, Programming, contains special bar code labels for changing the unit’s
settings.
Diagnostic Mode
Refer to Chapter 2, Diagnostic Modes, for details about running scanner and scale
diagnostics. Turn to Chapter 5, Problem Isolation, for a description of error codes
resulting from diagnostics.
Scanner and Scale Reset

The reset procedures and indicators are identical for scanner and scanner/scale
models. As with any electronic equipment, it is sometimes necessary to reset the
electronics. The reset procedure allows you to initiate a reset command to the
scanner. This may be necessary if the POS terminal has been switched off or the store
system has been reset while the unit is on. Reset can also be used to initiate and run
the unit’s internal Selftest routine.
Pressing and holding the Scanner Control Button for ten seconds initiates a reset,
which is sounded by a rapid number of beeps. For more information, see the topic,
Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation earlier in this section.
Scale Adjustments
The scale allows two user adjustments: zeroing and calibration. The first, and most
frequently performed, is ‘zeroing’ the scale. This operation resets the scale’s “at rest”
reading to zero which must be within the range of - 0.2 pounds (- 1.25 grams) to +0.6
pounds (0.27kg) since the last calibration. While the ‘at rest’ reading remains within
the zero range, the scale will automatically adjust itself to true zero. The scale also
automatically zeros itself on power-up if the weight present on the scale is within
these defined limits.

Zeroing the Scale

The zeroing operation may be performed by checkers and other store personnel.
Pressing and releasing the Scale Zero Button should return the scale to Normal
Operation. If the zero point moves out of the zero range due to debris accumulation or
other causes, pressing the Scale Zero Button will not reset the zero point. In this case
the weigh platter must be cleaned, debris chutes cleared of debris or the scale must
be recalibrated.
With the scanner/scale powered-up and at operating temperature:
1. Remove everything from the weighing surface of the scanner/scale.
2. Press the Scale Zero Button. (See Figure 55).
3. The Zero1 light will turn on and the display will show 0.00 lb (0.000 kg). If it does
not, see Chapter 5, Problem Isolation.
4. You have completed the scale zeroing function.

Alternatively, a reset (cycling power to the scanner) may also allow the scale to re-
zero.
Calibrating the Scale

The second adjustment, calibration, defines and sets a standard reference weight
range against which all product weights are compared. If your scale is set for weighing
in pounds, this range is 0 - 30 pounds, and, if your scale is set for weighing in
kilograms, the range is 0 - 15 kilograms. The scale must be calibrated upon initial
installation, whenever the scale cannot be zeroed, when the scale diagnostics indicate
a calibration error, when the weighing measure (pounds or kilograms) is changed, or
when the scale module has been replaced.
Normally, once the scale has been calibrated, the calibration must be verified and/or
approved by a local regulatory body. In many areas, the scale calibration switch must
be sealed before being placed into service. Consult the agency responsible for
regulating weighing devices in your area to ensure that you are meeting all legal and
regulatory requirements Chapter 6, "Calibration Procedures", describes the calibration
sequence and verification process.
Calibration can only be performed if the tamper seal that secures access to the
Calibration Switch is broken and the switch cover is removed. Breaking the seal may
legally render the scale inoperable until it has been recertified and a new seal
attached. Consult your local regulations before removing the calibration seal if you are
unsure of the legal requirements. Although the scale will physically continue to weigh
products, a broken seal may require recertification by a proper authority as
designated by your local laws.
1. Zero light operation is configurable.

Operational Maintenance
The scanner or scanner/scale will provide dependable service for many years. The
following maintenance procedures will keep your scanner or scanner/scale operating
at peak performance.
Cleaning
Exterior surfaces and scan windows exposed to spills, smudges or debris
accumulation require periodic cleaning at least twice daily to assure best performance
during scanning and weighing operations. Use a clean, lint-free cloth or paper towel
dampened with a nonabrasive, mild, water-based window cleaner to wipe away
stains, smudges, fingerprints, spills, etc. from the scan window and exterior surfaces
(Figure 34a).
Figure 34. Cleaning the Scanner
b (Models vary)
CAUTION
DO NOT spray
cleaners directly
on the scanner! a c
DO NOT use abrasive cleaning agents or abrasive pads to clean

this product. Harsh chemicals, disinfectants, and cleansers can
cause damage which will adversely affect scanning and weigh-
ing performance.
CAUTION
Daily, clean the debris chutes between the platter and the outer housing (Figure 34b).
Most items can be cleared from the debris chutes by carefully running a thin, stiff
object like a credit card along all sides of the weighing surface. If necessary, remove
the platter (Figure 34c) to clean the debris chutes and drip rail.

Vertical Scan Window Replacement

The Vertical Scan Window installed in the weigh Platter is replaceable. Follow these
instructions to remove and replace a Vertical Window:
To remove a Vertical Scan Window:
1. Handling by the features shown, remove the Platter as referenced in Figure 35 and
gently lift it straight up and off of the scanner. If the top edge of the Platter is blocked,
you may find it easier to grip the edges of the Platter as shown by the arrows.
Figure 35. Platter Removal
2. Grasp the front corner of the Platter’s top bezel as shown in Figure 36a, then
guide it away from the Platter as demonstrated in Figure 36b, making sure the
lip of the bezel is fully clear of the Platter’s top edge before lifting it off.
3. Carefully press in on the Vertical Window from the backside of the Platter to
remove it (see Figure 36c and Figure 36d). Carefully dispose of any damaged glass.
Figure 36. Vertical Scan Window Removal/Replacement
1 2
ab
cd 3
1 Top Bezel 3 Vertical Window

2 Bezel Lip

To Replace a Vertical Scan Window:
1. Carefully clean all adhesive or other obstructions from the Vertical Window
frame area of the Platter.
2. Apply adhesive squares to the corners of the backside of the Vertical Window.
3. Tilt the Vertical Window into position as shown in Figure 36d, then press around
the front edges of the window to secure it in place.
4. Reinstall the top bezel (Figure 36a), first hooking the bezel’s lip over the Platter’s
top edge, then pressing down along the front edge to engage the bezel’s snaps.
5. Clean both sides of the Vertical Scan Window using a paper towel or lint free
cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-based glass cleaner. DO NOT use
abrasive cleaners or pads.
6. Reinstall the Platter. Vertical Scan Window replacement is now complete.

NOTES

Chapter 4
Image Capture and Customer Service Scanner
The scanner provides an image capture function, and can optionally include a
Customer Service Scanner (CSS) for customer convenience. These premium features
offer state-of-the-art functionality to point of sale transactions.
Image Capture Feature

In addition to scanning bar codes, the scanner can optionally be used to photograph
images presented to the right side of the vertical window1. The sales associate
presses the scanner’s Image Capture button (see Figure 37) to initiate Image Capture
and take pictures.
The way in which the scanner takes pictures in Image Capture Mode is a configu-
rable feature. See Chapter 7, Programming for more details.
NOTE
Pictures can be optionally saved to an archive drive or other device via a cable
connection to the USB ‘B’ Image port (see Figure 3).
Figure 37. Image Capture
Image
Capture
Button
1. This feature can optionally be configured to capture images through the horizontal window instead. See the Imaging and CSS
Features section for more details.

Image Capture and Customer Service Scanner
Optional CSS Feature

The Customer Service Scanner (CSS) provides a convenient way for the customer to
present digital coupons or other bar codes from a cell phone or other device for
convenient reading during checkout. Items to be scanned are presented to the down-
facing CSS as shown in Figure 38.
Enable/Disable CSS
For systems which include an optional CSS, it is possible to program the EAS/CSS
button on the scanner so that the sales associate can activate or deactivate the CSS
using that button. This allows the associate to control when customers are able to
scan bar codes. See CSS Features on page 112 for more details about this option.
For more information about the Customer Service Scanner, reference the CSS Quick
Reference Guide (QRG).
Figure 38. Customer Service Scanner (CSS)
on
Coup

Chapter 5
Problem Isolation
The troubleshooting references provided in this section should be used in the event of
a suspected functional problem. This information will assist you in identifying and
resolving any problems.
The scanner/scale has a number of features that indicate when a scanner, EAS
deactivation system, or scale problem occurs. The unit may:
• emit a series of tones
• light the Health & Status Indicator (FRU status) display
• flash its indicator LEDs
• display error codes on the Remote Display (if installed)
Three error reporting modes are used: Power-Up Selftest, Operational tests and
Diagnostic tests. These test sequences are explained on the following pages.
Power-Up Selftest
The Power-up Selftest is a pre-operational series of tests that must be successfully
completed before the scanner indicates readiness for operation. This pre-operational
period is the time between power-up and normal operation during which the
software, firmware and hardware are being tested. These tests ensure that all
subsystems are fully functional before turning on. Refer to Operation and
Maintenance for a more detailed description of this and other scanner and scale
modes.
Operational Tests
These are the tests that run continually during Normal Operation and Sleep Mode.
Firmware checks all subsystems, accessory connections and the POS interface to
verify everything is operating normally. If a problem is detected at any time, a long,
low tone is sounded, an error code is shown on the Health & Status Indicator, and
operation may be halted. If you press the Scanner Control Button at that time, a series
of tones will be sounded that matches the error code displayed.

Problem Isolation
Diagnostic Tests
See Chapter 2, Scanner Diagnostic Mode, for details about running diagnostic tests for
the scanner and/or scale. If a problem is discovered during diagnostics, the scanner
will provide feedback about the source of the problem. The remainder of this section
describes these failure indications and includes troubleshooting flowcharts to help
isolate the problem.
Diagnostic Procedures
Your Point-Of-Sale (POS) system may contain many components that operate as a
system. Since almost all scanner or scale problems are caused by either the scanner,
scale, POS terminal or communication links between them, these troubleshooting
flowcharts focus on these components. Additionally, the optional Remote Scale
Display, AC/DC Power Supply and their cables are potential problems addressed in
this section.
The flowcharts provided in this section walk you through a diagnostic process that
will isolate the failed component and instruct as to the corrective action required.
Since internal scanner and scale components cannot be replaced by an operator or
installer, most functional errors will require the assistance of a trained Technical
Support person. However, if the problem is caused by faulty cable, power supply or
remote display, you can fix the problem by replacing the defective component and
complete the installation.
Error Codes
If an error is detected, the scanner will sound a low tone and the LEDs on the left
control panel will perform a “walking pattern” top to bottom indicating a failure. The
Health & Status Indicator (Figure 40) will display an error sequence as follows:
1. An “equals” (=) sign always leads the sequence.
2. A (Field Replaceable Unit) FRU indication code is displayed next. For two-digit
numbers, there will be a blank in between each number.
3. Next, a dash (or hyphen) is displayed (-).
4. Finally, the indicator will display an (Event Viewer) EVT code. This code provides
more advanced details about the failure for use by the repair technician. If you
are unable to resolve a problem, take note of the entire FRU Indication Sequence
and be prepared to communicate it to Technical Support when you make contact
for assistance.

Figure 39. FRU Indication Sequence
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
Sequence FRU Divider EVT

Start Symbol Indication Symbol Code
(”Equals”) (Varies) (”Hyphen”) (Varies)
Health and or or
Status Indicator
(Samples) (Samples)
Table 6 describes what the FRU indication codes in step 2 mean, and what corrective
action might be taken for each.
Figure 40. Health & Status Indicator
When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connec-

tions first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.
NOTE

Problem Isolation
Table 6. Error Code Table
Health &
Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
Indicator
Make sure the correct interface is selected, then scan the factory
defaults bar code and reset the unit. Also, see Chapter 7, Pro-
Configuration Error
gramming, for details about configuring the scanner using pro-
gramming bar codes.
Host Interface
Main Board Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.
Reserved
See Chapter 7, Programming, for details about configuring the

ScaleSentry Error scanner for this optional feature, which may not have been pur-
chased for your scanner.
Main Board Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.
See the topic Scale Error Reporting in this section for problem
Scale
identification and corrective actions.
Connect the Remote Display. If necessary, replace display or

Remote Display cable. Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using the
programming procedures described in Chapter 7, Programming.
Sensormatic Inter- No EAS communication. Check EAS cable connections and power
face to the EAS controller. Call technical support personnel.
Control Panel
Call technical support personnel.
USB Device
Scale Calibration Proceed to scale calibration procedure.
CPLD Call technical support personnel.
Try resetting the scanner. If the problem persists, unplug the unit
USB Host
and call technical support personnel.
See the topic Scale Error Reporting in this section for problem
Scale Configuration
identification and corrective actions.

Scale Error Reporting
Scale diagnostics uses the optional Remote Scale Display and the Zero Status lamp to
communicate specific scale failures.
This does not apply to Adaptive Scale models.
The following chart shows the Remote Display messages, the Scale Status lamp
indication, the problem that the scale is experiencing and what action should be
taken. When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections first
before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.
Remote Scale Status Problem

Action Required
Display LEDa Description
Check for stable installation. Change
Flash, pause, 1 scale motion filter using the labels found
Too much motion at
E _1 blink, long pause, in the Programming section; restart. If
power-up.
repeat sequence. the problem persists, the scale may
require calibration.
Flash, pause, 2
Call technical support personnel. Re-cal-
E__2 blinks, long pause, Calibration lost.
ibrate; restart; recertify (if required).
repeat sequence.
Flash, pause, 3 Scale communication
Call technical support personnel; report
E__3 blinks, long pause, lost. Internal scanner/
error.
repeat sequence. scale problem.
Flash, pause, 4
E__4 blinks, long pause, Scale module failure.
error.
repeat sequence.
Flash, pause, 5
E__5 blinks, long pause, Internal software fault.
error.
repeat sequence.
Other Scale Reporting
- Check debris chutes.
Cannot zero at power- - Verify that the weigh platter moves
up or weight remains freely.
on scale for more than - Remove item(s) from scale
-0- Off 4 minutes or weight - Press Scale Zero Button
has not returned to
zero between POS - for more information.
weight requestsb. - If the scale still fails to zero, recalibrate
the scale.
a. See , item #3.

b. This is a configurable feature.

Problem Isolation
Flowcharts
The problem isolation flowcharts on the following pages allow you to identify and
troubleshoot problems with your system.
Figure 41. Problem Isolation: Start
For units using an AC/DC adapter, verify that...
1. AC power cord is connected to a functional AC outlet.
2. IEC connectors are firmly connected.
3. DC power cord is firmly connected to scanner.
If your unit is a model which receives Power Off the
START Terminal (POT), verify that the I/F cable is securely
connected at both ends.
Power-up
Scanner power-up is signified by any or (Models vary)
all of the following: Power Magellan
- Illumination LEDs turn on Supply
- Status indicator LEDs turn on
- Speaker sounds tone(s)
- Remote display shows message NO
- A single red dot is visible on the 7-
segment display Check these
Does Have you potential problems:
NO checked the YES
the scanner power - AC power cord
power-up connections - AC/DC adaptor
Flashing Green LED ? ? - AC outlet
If the green good read indicator LEDs
are flashing slowly, the scanner is most YES
likely in Sleep Mode. Press and release
the scanner control button or wave your
hand in front of the vertical window to
"wake-up" the scanner.
Flashing green LEDs can also mean the Are the NO Ensure the green LEDs Are the NO
scanner has been disabled by the POS green indicator are enabled via pro- green indicator
terminal. To exit this mode, cycle power LEDs lit gramming bar codes. LEDs lit
or have the terminal re-enable the ? ?
scanner.
YES YES
Selftest Failure
If the scanner fails its Selftest, the
following takes place:
- Speaker sounds a tone at the lowest
value for approx. 3 seconds. Call Tech Support
- Green and Yellow LEDs flash on and Does
off alternately. the scanner NO Go to Selftest
- 7-segment display shows a code (1 to pass Selftest
C) to indicate the failure. flowchart
?
Consult the Selftest flowchart if you're
unsure the unit has passed Selftest. YES
NO Does the YES Does the YES Will the NO

Go to Scale scale weigh EAS Antenna scanner read Go to Poor/No
flowchart correctly deactivate bar codes Reading flowchart
? tags reliably
? ?
YES
Other Problems? Go to EAS

Call Tech Support system flowchart

Figure 42. Problem Isolation: Selftest
SELFTEST
START
Scan the Factory

Does the Does the YES Defaults bar code in Does the YES
NO Health & Status
Health & Status Health & Status Section 6 to enable the
Indicator show Indicator show default configuration
Indicator show
0 1. 1.
file. Restart the unit. ?
? ?
NO
YES NO
No interface selected
(Null Interface). Does the
Health & Status YES
Select an interface. Indicator show Call Tech Support
2., 3., 4. or 6.
?
Go to Scale
Error Reporting. NO
YES
TM
Does the NO Does the YES Check ScaleSentry Does the
Health & Status Health & Status feature configuration in Health & Status
YES Indicator Indicator the Programming section. Indicator show
show 7. show 5. Restart. 5.
? ? ?
NO
NO
Check Remote Display

Does the connection. Verify Remote Does the YES
YES Display configuration in the
Health & Status Health & Status
Indicator Programming section. If Indicator show
show 8. this fails, try connecting a 8.
? known-good display. Reset. ?
NO NO
Does the YES Check EAS Does the YES

Health & Status Health & Status Call Tech Support
Indicator connections. Reset. Indicator show
show 9. 9.
? ?
NO NO
Does the Does the

YES NO Health & Status YES
Calibrate the Health & Status
Scale. Indicator show
Indicator show A., b., E. or F.
C. ?
?
For this error, the Remote Display
may also show -0- or an error (E__#).
NO Does the Check CSS connections.

YES Verify configuration
Health & Status
Unit passes Selftest Indicator settings and features for
show d. the CSS.
?

Problem Isolation
Figure 43. Problem Isolation: Poor/No Reading

Have you verified that
all scan windows are clean
and scratch-free?
POOR/NO READING Before proceeding, verify that
START bar code samples presented
to scanner are of good quality
and a symbology the scanner
Enter Scanner Diagnostic Mode by is configured to read.
holding the Scanner Control Button
for five to nine seconds (until first 3,
and then 6 rapid tones are sounded), Scanner Diagnostics Mode can
then release. Scan a known-good bar be turned off by configuration.
code. Before proceeding, consult the
programming section of this
A good read is manual to make sure it is
signified by one enabled to be on.
flash of the Green
LED and a single Does the
beep1. scanner read NO
the bar code Call Tech Support
satisfactorily
?
YES
Reset the scanner by

holding down the Scanner
Control Button for 10
seconds.
If unexpected data
is being sent from
the host to the
scanner, consider Does the Does the
scanner pass YES YES
enabling the scanner read DONE
programmable the data to satisfactorily
feature Ignore Host the POS ?
Commands to ?
debug the system. NO NO
Go to No Transmit to Verify programmable

POS flowchart parameters using the
information and programming Does the
bar codes provided in the YES
scanner read DONE
Programming Section. Check satisfactorily
bar code symbology options ?
and other configurable
features. NO
Troubleshoot
the host or call
Tech Support.
1 Green and Yellow LEDs and beeper indications are configurable

features. Behavior may vary from that described here.

Figure 44. Problem Isolation: No Transmit to POS
NO TRANSMIT TO POS
START
Check the interface (I/F) Verify programmable

cable connections. If parameters using the
possible, retest the information and programming Does the
system using a bar codes provided in the scanner pass YES
known-good I/F cable. Programming Section. Check the data to
DONE
interface and I/F options, the POS
inactive symbologies and other ?
configurable features. NO
Does the
scanner pass NO
Troubleshoot
the data to the host or call
the POS Tech Support.
?
YES
DONE

Problem Isolation
Figure 45. Problem Isolation: Scale
If this is a new installation,

SCALE START make sure any foam packing
pieces have been removed
from the scale cavity before
View the Remote proceeding. Lift off the platter
Display and/or the to verify, then set the platter Call Tech Support
Yellow scale status LED back into position.
for the scale error code.
Reference the topic, YES
Scale Error Reporting in
this manual for more
information. Is Is the
YES NO motion filter
DONE problem
fixed at its maximum
? setting
-0- ?
- Check for debris under platter.
shown on YES - Verify that the weigh platter NO
RemoteDisplay/ moves freely.
Yellow Increase the scale motion filter
- Remove item(s) from scale. setting by 1. Reference the
LED off - Press Scale Zero Button.
? Programming Section for more
- Cycle power to the scanner. information.
NO - If the scale still fails to zero,
recalibrate the scale. NO
E__1
shown on Problem is too much Is
Remote Display/ YES motion at power-up. problem
YES
Yellow LED Correct excess vibration fixed
DONE
Flash once in counter if possible. ?
?
NO
NO
E__2
shown on Problem is calibration lost. Will the
Remote Display/ YES Recalibrate the scale scale
YES
Yellow LED using the calibration DONE
calibrate
Flash twice procedures in this manual. ?
?
NO For this error, the Health & Status
display may also show a 'C'.
E__3
shown on Problem is scale Is
YES communication lost. YES
RemoteDisplay/ problem DONE
Yellow LED Flash Verify cable connections fixed
3 times to/from the scale. ?
?
NO NO
E__4 shown on Remote

Display/Yellow LED Flash Call Tech Support
4 times. Problem is Scale
Load Cell failure.

Figure 46. Problem Isolation: Remote Display
REMOTE DISPLAY Scanner-scale models that include

START a Remote Display when shipped
from the factory, are configured
for use with the display. If you're
unsure of the settings for your
unit, contact Tech Support.
Is the NO Use the programming bar

unit configured codes in the Programming
for a Remote Section to enable operation
Display using a Remote Display.
?
YES
Verify that the Remote

Display cable is securely NO Is the YES
attached to the external problem DONE
Remote Display port and fixed
reset the scanner. ?
Is the Re-connect using a Is the

NO known-good Remote YES Replace the
problem problem
fixed Display. Reset the fixed Remote Display
? scanner and retest. ?
YES NO
DONE Call Tech Support

Problem Isolation
Figure 47. Problem Isolation: EAS System
NO EAS DEACTIVATION
START Ensure operator has been trained in
proper EAS system use (reference the
topic “Deactivating Security Labels”).
Verify programmable
Check all EAS parameters using the Does the If possible, retest the
cable connections. NO
information and barcodes EAS Antenna system substituting
provided in the Programming deactivate known-good EAS cable
Section. Check EAS options, labels and/or controller box.
and other configurable features. ?
YES
Does the NO
EAS Antenna
deactivate Does the
labels YES EAS Antenna
? DONE deactivate
YES labels
?
NO
DONE
Call Tech Support.

Chapter 6
Calibration Procedures
This section applies to scanner/scale models with single or dual interval.
Make sure to follow the proper associated procedure for each of these
options. Procedures specific to single interval units is highlighted in a
salmon color. Procedures specific to dual interval units is highlighted ina
NOTE teal color.
These procedures are not applicable for adaptive scale models. Consult your
adaptive scale documentation or the adaptive scale manufacturer for more
information.
A number of situations require the scale to be calibrated. They are:

• at initial installation of the scanner/scale
• if the scale cannot be re-zeroed
• when changing the weight measure from pounds to kilograms or vice-versa
• if diagnostics indicate a calibration error
• when removing/replacing any scale assembly or the Main Board
• when required by local regulations
Follow the procedures on the following pages to ensure that the scanner/scale will
meet Weights and Measurement requirements.
Certification of the scanner/scale’s weighing apparatus is subject to Fed-
eral, State and Local Weights and Measures statutes and is restricted to
LEGAL NOTE authorized government agencies and/or duly registered agents thereof.
Anytime a scale is calibrated, it should be properly sealed with a lead and
wire or paper seal before being placed into service.
It is your responsibility to check with the appropriate authorities in your

area to ensure compliance with pertinent regulations before removing any
official seals or placing a newly calibrated scanner/scale into service.
DO NOT apply a calibration seal to include the EAS antenna (if one is present).
Reference Figure 49. If the antenna must be removed for other reasons, this
would unnecessarily cause the scale to require recalibration.
CAUTION

Description of Calibration Sequence

The Calibration Sequence sets the scale to an accurate reference point for weighing.
This process involves the use of a Field Standard Weight Set (31.5-pounds) for
calibration in pounds, (18.5-kilograms) for Metric calibration. Once calibration has
been successfully completed, the scanner/scale uses the certified weight as a
reference for subsequent weighing activities.
These verification procedures follow the U.S. National Institute of Standards and
Technology 44 Handbook guidelines for bench/counter scale installations.
If any of these tests fail to meet the required weight indications, you must calibrate
the scanner/scale. Refer to the calibration instructions in this section for the proper
procedures.
You may be required by state and/or local regulations to have procedures other than these
performed by a certified technician or verification official.
Access to the calibration switch should be restricted with a paper or a wire and lead
seal after the calibration has been performed if required by your local regulatory
agency.
The Calibration Sequence must be performed without removing the scanner/

scale from its installed position.
NOTE
The following tools and supplies will be required to perform the calibration process:
• 31.5 pound Field Standard Weight Set1.
(English calibration only).
• 18.5 kilogram Field Standard Weight Set2.
(Metric calibration only).
• Lead wire or paper seal (as required by law).
Motion Test
This test verifies that the scale will not ‘zero’ when the weighing surface of the
scanner/scale is in motion.
1. Verify that the Zero lamp is On and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds, 0.000
pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
2. Press lightly on the weigh platter of the scanner/scale with one hand and at the
same time press and release the Zero switch on the operator’s panel. The Zero
lamp should turn Off and the Remote Display should not display 0.00 pounds,
0.000 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
3. Remove your hand from the weighing platform and verify that the Zero lamp is
On and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds, 0.000 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
1. NOTE: Throughout the calibration procedures, specified weights may be achieved by using a combination of weight from this
set. e.g. 20 lbs may be made up of one 10.00 lb. weight and two 5.00 lb. weights.
2. NOTE: Throughout the calibration procedures, specified weights may be achieved by using a combination of weights from this
set. e.g. 10 kgs. may be made up of one 5.00 kg. and five 1.00 kg. weights.

Automatic Zero Setting Test
This test verifies that the scanner/scale automatic zero setting mechanism is
operating correctly.
SINGLE INTERVAL DUAL INTERVAL

Place 0.006 pounds (3 grams for metric) on the Place 0.0035 pounds (1.6 grams for metric) on the
center of the weighing platform. The entire center of the weighing platform. The entire weight
weight must be placed on the weighing platform must be placed on the weighing platform at once
at once for this test to be valid. The Yellow LED for this test to be valid. The Zero lamp should go
should go Off and the Remote Display should Off and the Remote Display should read 0.005
read 0.01 pounds (0.005 kilograms). pounds (0.002 kilograms).
The scanner/scale has an adaptive zero capture mechanism that re-zeros the
scale over time if there is a slow change in the zero level; thus, if all the weight is
not placed on the weighing surface at one time, the Zero lamp will remain On and
the Remote Display will read 0.00 pounds or 0.000 pounds (0.000 kilograms).
When the weight is removed, the Zero lamp will turn off and the display will
NOTE show a minus sign . lb . Press the Zero switch to rezero the scale.
Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration

1. Assure that the scanner/scale is stable.
2. Power-up the scanner/scale.
3. Allow the unit to reach temperature equilibrium for at least one hour. If the
scanner/scale is already at room temperature, allow at least 15 minutes to accli-
mate.
4. Remove all weight from the weighing surface and ensure that there are no
obstructions in the debris chutes of the scanner/scale.
Do not pay attention to any message on the POS display.
NOTE

Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms)

1. Before proceeding, ensure that the scanner/scale has been prepared for this
process by performing the preceding steps titled, Preparing the Scanner/Scale
for Calibration
2. Verify that there are no obstructions under the weigh platter. Remove the weigh
platter
(L-Platter) and make sure that there are no obstructions in the debris chutes
(see Figure 10).
3. If one is present, cut and remove the seal securing the calibration switch access
cover. The seal may not be present if this is the initial installation of the scan-
ner/scale.
4. Slide the cover to reveal the switch as shown in Figure 48.
5. Use a long, blunt object, such as the eraser end of a pencil to press and release
the Calibration Switch and place the scanner/scale in Calibration Mode (see Fig-
ure 48c). The scanner/scale will sound a tone indicating that it is in Calibration
Mode. The Scale Status (yellow LED) will flash, indicating the scale is in Calibra-
tion Mode. If one is present, the Remote Display will show the message “ESCL”
(empty scale).
6. Reinstall the weigh platter.
7. Press the Scale Zero Button. The Scale Status (yellow LED) will go out for approx-
imately 10 seconds (or less) and the Remote Display (if present) will alternately
display ---- and ____ until the scale is ready to proceed.
8. When the scale is ready, the Scale Status (yellow LED) begins blinking again, and
the Remote Display (if present) will show the message “Ad20 (add twenty
pounds)” or “Ad10 (add ten kilograms).” The scanner/scale will also sound one
tone if the scale is weighing in kilograms or two tones for pounds if you don’t
have a Remote Display.
9. Place the correct weight (twenty pounds for calibration in pounds, or ten kilo-
grams for metric calibration) from the Field Standard Weight set, onto the center
of the weighing area. Press the Scale Zero Button again.
10. The Scale Status LED extinguishes for approximately 10 seconds and the
Remote
Display (if present) alternately displays ---- and ____ until the scale is ready to
proceed.
11. If the calibration was successful, the speaker sounds a single tone, the Scale
Status LED begins blinking again, and “End-” appears in the Remote Display (if
one is present).
12. If the calibration was not successful, the speaker sounds five tones indicating a
scale failure, and the Scale Status LED will blink twice, strobe (fast blinks), and
then continually repeat this sequence until reset. Remove all weight from the
Weigh Platter, and repeat the procedure starting with step 8.
13. Press the Scale Zero Button again to permanently store the calibration data and
exit Calibration Mode. You have completed the calibration of the scale. The unit’s
calibration must now be verified as required by state and/or local weights and
measures regulations. The verification procedure must be performed to assure

that a scale will pass Weights and Measures requirements before it is placed
into commercial/retail service.
You have completed the scale calibration procedure. Before replacing the Calibration
Switch Cover and sealing the scale, you must now continue with the calibration
verification tests to complete the scale’s calibration. If you are weighing in pounds,
continue with the following procedures to verify that the scale was successfully
calibrated and that it weighs properly. If you are weighing in kilograms, turn to the
instructions titled, "Calibration Verification (Kilograms)" on page 86.
Figure 48. Calibration Cover and Switch Location
1 Calibration Seal Location Calibration Switch Opening. Use a

3 long, blunt object to reach in and
2 Calibration Access Cover press the Calibration Switch.
If an EAS antenna is present, it must be lifted in order to access the calibration

switch. See Figure 49.
NOTE

Figure 49. If one is present, move EAS antenna to access the Calibration Switch
1 EAS Antenna 2 Calibration Switch Cover

Calibration Verification (Pounds)
Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required to perform
these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures follow the National
Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44 guidelines for grocery scale
installations. You may be required by state or local law to have these procedures
performed by a certified technician or verified by a proper official.
These calibration verification procedures cover five (5) different tests:
• Increasing-Load Test
• Shift Test
• Blanking Test
• Decreasing-Load Test
• Return to Zero Test
If the scale fails any of the following tests, go to Section 5, Problem Isolation, of this manual and
follow the troubleshooting procedures for SCALE FAILURE.
NOTE
Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)

This test checks Scale operation with two, four and six pound weights.

This test checks Scale operation with five, ten and
This test checks Scale operation with two, four
fifteen pound weights. and six pound weights.
1. Check that the display reads 0.00 lb. when 1. Check that the display reads 0.00 lb. when at
at rest with nothing on the weighing sur- rest with nothing on the weighing surface. (The
face. (The Zero Status LED is steadily lit).
Zero Status LED is on steady).
2. Place a five-pound weight on the center of 2. Place a two-pound weight on the center of the
the weighing surface and check that the weighing surface. Verify that the Remote
display reads 5.00 lb. Display reads 2.00 lb.
3. Place an additional five pounds on the cen-3.Place an additional two pounds (four pounds
ter of the weighing surface and check thattotal) on the center of the weighing surface. Verify
that the Remote Display reads between 3.995 and
the display reads between 9.99 and 10.01 lb.
4.005 lb.
4. Place an additional five pounds on the cen- 4.Place an additional two pounds (six pounds
ter of the weighing surface and check that total) on the center of the weighing surface. Verify
the display reads between 14.99 and 15.01. that the Remote Display reads between 5.995 and
Remove the weights and verify that the dis- 6.005. Remove the weights and verify that the
play reads 0.00. display reads 0.00.
5. You have completed the Increasing-Load 5. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test
Test (Phase 1). (Phase 1).

Shift Test (6 Pounds Dual Interval ONLY)

The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weighing surface
of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to Figure 50 when performing this
test.
DUAL INTERVAL
1. Place and remove, in succession, a six-pound
load on the center of each of the four quad-
rants: 1, 2, 3, and 4, (as shown in Figure 50) of
the scanner/scale’s weigh platter. Verify
that a reading of between 5.995 and 6.005
lb. registers, under load, in each quadrant
tested. Check that the display returns to
0.00 between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant
of the weighing surface, remove all weight
from the scale. This completes the 6 pound
Shift Test.
Figure 50. Shift Test
1 2
4 3
1 2
3
4 (Models vary)

Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2 Dual Interval)
The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to the POS interface
type and may not necessarily be set at 30 pounds, which is the standard
setting. For this test, continue to place weights in two pound increments
only up to the upper weight limit set for your scale.
NOTE
DUAL INTERVAL
After completing the Shift Test, you must
complete the Increasing Load Test using 8.0, 10.0
and 12.0 pounds of weight.
1. With the scale starting at zero, place 8.0
pounds in the center of the weighing surface
and check that the display reads between
7.995 and 8.005 lb.
2. Place an additional two pounds (10 pounds
total) in the center of the weighing surface.
Check that the display reads between 9.995
and 10.005 lb.
3. Place an additional two pounds in the center
of the weighing surface increasing the load
to 12.0 pounds and check that the display
reads between 11.995 and 12.005 lb.
4. Place an additional five pounds (fifteen
pounds total) on the center of the weighing
surface. Verify that the Remote Display
reads between 14.995 and 15.01. Remove
the weights and verify that the display reads
0.00.
5. You have completed the Increasing-Load
Test (Phase 2).
Shift Test (10 Pounds)

test.

1. Place and remove in succession, a ten- 1. Place and remove, in succession, a ten-
pound load on the center of each of the four pound load on the center of each of the four
quadrants (1, 2, 3, and 4 in Figure 50) of the quadrants: 1, 2, 3, and 4, (as shown in Figure
scanner/scale’s weigh platter. Verify that a 50) of the scanner/scale’s weigh platter.
reading of between 9.99 and 10.01 lb regis- Verify that a reading of between 9.99 and
ters under load and that the display returns 10.01 lb. registers, under load, in each quad-
to 0.00 between each load. rant tested. Check that the display returns to
0.00 between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quad- 2.After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant of
rant of the weighing surface, remove all the weighing surface, remove all weight from the
weight from the scale. You have completed scale. This completes the Shift Test.
the Shift Test.

Increasing- Load Test (Single Interval Phase 2) (Dual Interval Phase

3)
After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load Test using
20.0, 25.0 and 30.0 pounds of weight.
The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to the POS interface
type and may not necessarily be set at 30 pounds, which is the standard set-
ting. For this test, continue to place weights in five pound increments only up
to the upper weight limit set for your scale.
NOTE

After completing the Shift Test, you must After completing the Shift Test, you must
complete the Increasing Load Test using 20.0, complete the Increasing Load Test using 8.0, 10.0
25.0 and 30.0 pounds of weight. and 12.0 pounds of weight.
1. With the scale starting at zero, place 20.0 1.With the scale starting at zero, place 20.0
pounds in the center of the weighing sur- pounds in the center of the weighing surface and
face and check that the display reads check that the display reads between 19.99 and
between 19.99 and 20.01 lb. 20.01 lb.
2. Place an additional five pounds in the center 2.Place an additional five pounds (25 pounds
of the weighing surface, increasing the load total) in the center of the weighing surface. Check
to 25.0 pounds and check that the display that the display reads between 24.99 and 25.01
reads between 24.99 and 25.01 lb. lb.
3. Place an additional five pounds in the center 3.Place an additional five pounds in the center of
of the weighing surface increasing the load the weighing surface increasing the load to 30.0
to 30.0 pounds and check that the display pounds and check that the display reads between
reads between 29.99 and 30.01 lb. 29.99 and 30.01 lb.
4. Remove the weights and verify that the dis- 4.Remove the weights and verify that the display
play reads 0.00. reads 0.00.
5. You have completed the Increasing-Load 5.You have completed the Increasing-Load Test
Test (Phase 2) (Phase 3).
Blanking Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability has been
exceeded if a weight greater than 0.05 pounds over its maximum upper weight is
placed upon the unit.
1. Place weights that total the upper weight limit plus 0.051 pounds on the scale.
For example: If the upper limit is set at 30 pounds, place weights totaling 30.051
pounds on the scale.
2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens (_ - - -). This is the over-
weight indication.
The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at any
weight greater than its upper weight limit, but must blank when the upper
weight limit plus 0.051 pounds are set upon the weighing surface.
NOTE

Decreasing-Load Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy object is
followed by a significantly smaller object.
If the upper weight limit for your scale is set to other than 30 pounds,
begin by placing weight equaling your upper limit setting.
NOTE

1. Place a 30.0-pound load on the scale and 1. Place a 30.0-pound load on the scale and verify
verify that the display shows between 29.99 that the display shows between 29.99 and 30.01
and 30.01 pounds. pounds.
2. Remove weights to leave 20 pounds on the 2.Remove enough weights to leave 20 pounds on
scale. Check that the display shows the scale. Check that the display shows between
between 19.99 and 20.01. 19.99 and 20.01.
3. Remove another 15.0 pounds from the scale 3.Remove 8.0 pounds and verify the display reads
and check that the scale reads 5.00 lb. between 11.995 and 12.01 pounds.
4. You have completed the Decreasing Load 4.Remove 4.0 pounds and verify the display reads
Test. between 7.995 and 8.005 pounds.
5.Remove another 6.0 pounds from the scale and
check that the scale reads 2 lbs.
6.You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.
Return to Zero Test

This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed successfully, the
scanner/scale returns to zero. Remove all weights from the scale and verify that the
scale reads 0.00 lb.
After completing this test, close the calibration access cover and seal per local
Weights and Measures requirements. This final step must agree with the legal
requirements of your state or local government.
You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing in pounds.
If the scanner/scale passes all these tests:
1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and install a seal (if
required).

If the scale fails any of these tests, turn to Section 5, Problem Isolation and follow the
troubleshooting procedures for Scale Failures.

Calibration Verification (Kilograms)

Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required to perform
these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures follow the National
Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44 guidelines for grocery scale
installations. You may be required by state or local law to have these procedures
performed by a certified technician or verified by a proper official.
These calibration verification procedures cover five (5) different tests:
• Increasing-Load Test· Decreasing-Load Test
• Shift Test · Return to Zero Text
• Blanking Test
If the scale fails any of these tests, go to the topic Scale Error Reporting in
Section 5, Problem Isolation, of this manual.
NOTE
Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)

This test checks Scale operation for increasing This test checks scale operation for increasing
loads from 0.100 kg and 7.50 kg. loads from 0.050 kg and 3 kg.
1. Check that the display reads 0.000 kg when 1. Check that the display reads 0.000 kg when at
at rest with nothing on the weighing surface. rest with nothing on the weighing surface. (The
(The Yellow LED is steadily lit). Zero Status LED is on steady).
2. Place a 100 gram weight on the center of the 2.Place a 50 gram weight on the center of the
weighing surface and check that the display weighing surface and check that the Remote
reads 0.100 kg. Display reads 50 grams.
3. Place an additional 200 grams on the center 3.Place an additional 100 grams on the center of
of the weighing surface and check that the the weighing surface (.0300 kg. total) and check
display reads 0.300 kg. that the Remote Display reads 150 grams.
of the weighing surface and check that the the weighing surface and check that the Remote
display reads 0.500 kg. Display reads 250 grams.
5. Place an additional 100 grams on the center 5. Place an additional 50 grams on the center of
of the weighing surface and check that the the weighing surface and check that the display
display reads 0.600 kg. reads 300 grams.
9. Increase the weight on the scale to 7.50 kg 9. Increase the weight on the center of the
on the center of the weighing surface and weighing surface to 2.5 kg and check that the
check that the display reads between 7.495 display reads between 2.998 and 3.002 kg.
and 7.505 kg.
10. Remove the weights and verify that the dis- 10. Remove the weights and verify that the
play reads 0.000 kg. You have completed the display reads 0.000 kg. You have completed the
Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1). Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).

Shift Test Metric (2 Kilogram Dual Interval ONLY)
test.
DUAL INTERVAL
1. Place and remove, in succession, a 2 kilo-
gram load on the center of each of the four
quadrants: 2, 3, 4, and 5, and in the center (1)
of the scanner/scale’s weighing platform
(see Figure 51). Verify that the Remote Dis-
play shows a reading of between 1.998 and
2.002 kg for each quadrant/center test.
Check that the display returns to 0.000
between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant
and the center of the weighing surface,
remove all weight from the scale. This com-
pletes the Shift Test Metric (2 Kilogram).
Figure 51. Metric Shift Test
2 3
1
5 4
2 3
1
4
5 (Models vary)

Increasing Load Test (Phase 2 Dual Interval ONLY)

After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load Test using 4, 5
and 6 kilograms of weight.
The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type and may not neces-
sarily be set at 15 kilograms, which is the standard setting. For this test, continue to place
weights in 1 kilogram increments only to the upper weight limit set for your scale.
NOTE
DUAL INTERVAL
1. Place 4 kilograms in the center of the weigh-
ing surface and check that the Remote
Display reads between 3.998 kg and 4.002
kg.
2. Place an additional 1 kilogram in the center
of the weighing surface and check that the
display reads between 4.998 kg and 5.002
kg.
3. Place an additional 1 kilogram in the center
of the weighing surface and check that the
display reads between 5.998 kg and 6.005
kg.
4. Increase the weight on the center of the
weighing surface to 7.50 kg and check that
the display reads between 7.495 and 7.505
kg.
5. Remove the weights and verify that the dis-
play reads 0.000 kg. You have completed the
Increasing-Load Test.
Shift Test — Metric (5 Kilograms)

test.

1. Place and remove in succession, a 5.0 kilo- 1. Place and remove, in succession, a 5.0 kilogram
gram load on the center of each of the four load on the center of each of the four quadrants:
quadrants (2, 3, 4, and 5 in Figure 51) and in 2, 3, 4, and 5, and in the center (1) of the scanner/
the center (1) of the scanner/scale’s weigh- scale’s weighing platform (see Figure 51). Verify
ing platform. Verify that the display shows a that the Remote Display shows a reading of
reading of between 4.995 and 5.005 kg for between 4.998 and 5.002 kg for each quadrant/
each quadrant/center test and that the dis- center test. Check that the display returns to
play returns to 0.000 between each load. 0.000 between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quad- 2.After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant
rant and the center of the weighing surface, and the center of the weighing surface, remove all
remove all weight from the scale. This com- weight from the scale. This completes the Shift
pletes the Shift Test — Metric (5 Kilograms). Test — Metric (5 Kilograms).

Increasing- Load Test (Single Interval Phase 2)
(Dual Interval Phase 3)
The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type and may not necessarily be
set at 15 kilograms, which is the standard setting. For this test, continue to place weights in 2.50 kilo-
grams increments only to the upper weight limit set for your scale.
NOTE

After completing the Shift Test, you must After completing the Shift Test, you must
complete the Increasing Load Test using 10.00, complete the Increasing Load Test using 10.00,
12.50 and 15 kilograms of weight. 12.50 and 15 kilograms of weight.
1. Place 10.00 kilograms in the center of the 1. Place 10.00 kilograms in the center of the
weighing surface and check that the display weighing surface and check that the Remote
reads between 9.990 kg and 10.010 kg. Display reads between 9.990 kg and 10.010 kg.
2. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the 2.Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center
center of the weighing surface and check of the weighing surface and check that the display
that the display reads between 12.490 kg reads between 12.490 kg and 12.510 kg.
and 12.510 kg.
3. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the 3.Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center
center of the weighing surface and check of the weighing surface and check that the display
that the display reads between 14.990 kg reads between 14.990 kg and 15.010 kg.
and 15.010 kg.
4. Remove the weights and verify that the dis- 4.Remove the weights and verify that the display
play reads 0.000 kg. reads 0.000 kg.
5. You have completed Phase 2 of the increas- 5.You have completed Phase 3 of the Increasing
ing load test. Load Test.
Blanking Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability has been
exceeded if a weight greater than 0.82 kilograms over its maximum upper weight limit
is placed upon the scale platter.
1. Place weights that total the upper limit plus 0.82 kilograms on the weigh platter.
For example: If the upper limit is set at 15 kilograms, place weight totaling 15.82
kilograms.
2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens (_---). This is the over-
weight
indication.
The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at any weight greater than its
upper limit plus 0.82 kilograms are set upon the weighing surface.
NOTE

Decreasing-Load Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy object is
followed by a significantly smaller object.
If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 15 kilograms, begin by placing weight equaling your
upper limit plus 0.8 kilograms.
NOTE

1. Place weights that total 15.8 kilograms. 1.Place weights that total 15.8 kilograms.
2. Remove weights to leave 10 kilograms on 2.Remove weights to leave 10 kilograms on the
the scale and verify that the display shows scale and verify that the display shows between
between 9.990 and 10.010 kilograms. 9.990 and 10.010 kilograms.
3. Remove an additional 9.00 kilograms from 3.Remove an additional 4 kilograms from the
the scale and check that the scale reads scale and check that the scale reads between
1.000 kg. 5.998 and 6.005 kg.
4. You have completed the Decreasing Load 4.Remove an additional 2 kilograms from the
Test. scale and check that the scale reads between
3.998 and 4.002 kg.
5.Remove an additional 3 kilograms from the
scale and check that the scale reads 1 kg.
6.You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.
Return to Zero Test

This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed successfully, the
scanner/scale returns to zero. Without any weight on the weigh platter, verify that
the scale reads 0.000 kg.
You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing in kilograms.
If the scanner/scale passes all these tests:
1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and install a seal (if
required).

If the scale fails any of these tests, turn to Section 5, Problem Isolation and follow the
troubleshooting procedures for Scale Failures.

Chapter 7
Programming
Introduction to Label Programming
The programming bar code labels contained in this manual will allow you to customize
and configure features and settings for your scanner (scanner/scale). To ensure full
compatibility and proper function, use only the programming bar codes in this manual
and other product-specific publications to program scanner features.
This manual has been developed to make it quick and easy for users of all levels to
find the information needed to understand and configure features. The following
descriptions will help you to determine where to go from here.
Understanding the Basics

If you have little or no prior experience with programming using bar code labels, you
should review the first few pages of this section to familiarize yourself with the basics
of scanner programming before performing any changes to your configuration.
Using a Bar Code Mask

The programming bar codes in this manual have been placed as multiples per page. In
order to present them only one at a time to the scanner, a bar code mask is provided
on the opposite side of this page.
Going Green
Thank you for using the bar code mask on the opposite side of this page. This manual
has been formatted to minimize the quantity of pages needed to provide all of the
programming bar codes available for this product.

Programming
Bar Code Mask
Cut a hole in this page and remove it from the manual as indicated to create a sleeve
through which bar codes (starting in the following section) can be individually viewed
and scanned. It is important that only one bar code at a time be presented to the
scanner.
1
2
1. Bar Code Mask Sheet 3. Manual (folded)

2. Bar Code

Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System
Your scanner MUST be equipped with the correct hardware (interface board, cable,
etc.) to properly communicate with your host system. Contact your dealer for
information if you have questions about your scanner’s hardware compatibility.
You may also want to contact the dealer or your system administrator if you have no
record of how your scanner was pre-programmed at the factory. Scanners are
typically programmed with the default settings for specific interface types (see
Appendix E, Factory Defaults for more information); however, your scanner may have
been custom configured with settings that are unique to your company or application.
Once you know the scanner’s current settings, you can determine what changes will
be required to allow communication with your host system and/or optional features
you choose to modify to customize your installation. After recording the modifications
needed, finish reading this section, then turn to the appropriate page and follow the
instructions to program the scanner.
When all scanner features are programmed to your satisfaction, the scanner is ready
to be placed into operation.
Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation

Most scanner programming falls within four general categories:
General Scanner and Scale Features — are features common to all interface types.
Examples include beeper adjustments such as volume and length, read verification
settings, etc.
EAS Features — control the settings for initerfacing with the (optional) EAS device.
Interface Related Features — are the mandatory settings necessary to allow

communication with your host terminal. Examples of these settings are: RS-232 baud
rate and parity.
It is possible, via programming bar codes, to change the interface type (for
example: from RS-232 to IBM Port 17). Great care should be taken to select
the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or
POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS
CAUTION make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
Ensure that your planned modifications are compatible with the current
interface. For example, baud rate selections are only valid in the RS-232
interface. The scanner will sound an error tone when scanning programming
labels for features invalid to the current interface group.
NOTE
Symbology Programming — gives the scanner the capability to autodiscriminate as few

as one, and as many as all available symbologies. For optimal scanner performance
enable only those symbologies required. Additionally the scanner may be
programmed with the standard options available for the various symbologies, such as
check digit, minimum label length, fixed and variable length bar codes, etc.
If you experience difficulties, have questions or require additional information, contact
your local distributor, or call your dealer or sales representative.

Programming
Programming Overview
The scanner’s programmable feature settings can be modified to accommodate your
system’s unique requirements. These settings can be communicated to the scanner
in one of two ways:
1. Commands can be sent directly from the host. A limited set of host commands
are available. Refer to Appendix D for more details or contact Tech Support.
2. Programming bar code labels can also be used to modify the scanner’s program-
mable settings. This manual provides the bar code labels and instructions nec-
essary to configure the scanner’s features and options.
When you program the scanner using any of the methods above, the scanner
will store the changes until reprogrammed or returned to factory defaults.
NOTE
3. Alternatively, a configuration utility called “Scanalyzer” can be used to program

the scanner.
Programming via Handheld Device

The scanner can also accept programming via either its USB or auxiliary ports using a
handheld scanning device. Eligible handheld devices must have the ability to transmit
the C128 1D and Data Matrix 2D programming bar codes presented in this manual.
Several DatalogicTM handheld models support this functionality. Handheld data
format requirements (baud rate, parity, etc.) are presented in Appendix F of this
manual. Unless it is a USB handheld model, the programmable feature, Aux Port
Mode, must also be set to “External Handheld Input” to allow operation.
What Is Programming Mode?

Programming Mode is a state in which the scanner must be placed in order to accept
commands via programming bar code labels. When programming using the bar code
labels in this manual, the scanner is typically placed in Programming Mode by
scanning the Enter/Exit Programming Mode label.
While in the Programming Mode, the scanner only recognizes the special
programming bar codes contained in this programming guide. See Appendix A for
information about scanner indications while in the Programming Mode.
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode

When needed, an Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code is available at the top of
each programming page.
Your scanner will read the 2D programming bar codes in this manual while in
Programming Mode, regardless of whether 2D reading capability has been
enabled as an option.
NOTE

Programming Session
A typical programming session is conducted as follows:
1. Scan the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code to place the scanner in Pro-
gramming Mode. Depending upon its current programming, the scanner may
emit a beep or beeps, indicating it has read the bar code and the green LED will
flash on and off slowly while the scanner remains in Programming Mode. Nor-
mal scanning functions are disabled.
2. Scan the programming bar code(s) that is (are) specially encoded to make the
desired changes. With few exceptions1, the scanner will emit a triple beep each
time you scan a valid programming bar code.
Not all features are available for all interfaces and the scanner will sound an
error tone when scanning programming bar codes for features invalid to the
current interface. Only features supported by the currently active interface
will be implemented.
NOTE
If a bar code is scanned that changes the scanner’s interface, all previous
configuration items scanned in the programming session are lost.
NOTE
Additionally, when programming a feature requiring you to scan single digits to

set a multi-digit number, such as Minimum Label Length, scanning the Enter/
Exit Programming Mode bar code (or any item tag/item value bar code) before
completing all input will result in an error tone and cause the scanner to exit
Programming Mode. Under these circumstances, the current feature you were
trying to set is thrown out; any previous bar codes scanned during the session
will take effect.
It is recommended that programming sessions be limited to one feature at a
time. Should you make a mistake in the programming sequence, it can be dif-
ficult to discover where an error has been made if several features are pro-
grammed at once. Additionally, it can be confusing to determine which
NOTE features may or may not have been successfully set following such a ses-
sion.
3. Scan the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code to save any new settings and
exit Programming Mode. The scanner will sound a beep and reset upon exiting
Programming Mode, and the green LED will return to its usual state (on steady
or off).
The scanner will exit Programming Mode under the following conditions:
—the programming sequence has been completed or the Enter/Exit Program-
ming Mode bar code is scanned
—five minutes have passed without scanning activity. Any data programmed
during the current session will be ignored, and the scanner will reset and
revert to its condition previous to initiating the exited session.
1. Some features, such as Minimum Label Length, require you to select the label’s length by scanning a series of single-digit bar
codes. A single ‘good read’ beep is sounded when scanning these single digits in Programming Mode. Only the final required
digit in the sequence will produce a triple beep when scanned, indicating a successfully programmed feature.

Programming
—power is disconnected. Disconnecting power during Programming Mode,

before scanning the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code, will cause all
new settings to be ignored1. On power-up, the scanner will return to previous
settings.
4. Maintain a good record of all changes made to ensure that you know if the origi-
nal factory settings have been changed.
Programming Sequence
To modify a scanner feature (item), the programming bar codes contained in this
manual must be scanned in a given sequence depending upon the feature being
programmed (as shown in Table 8). There are three possible programming sequences:
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface
configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session.
(Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to the
stored values for that interface type.)
NOTE
A. Programming sample A (the most commonly used format) demonstrates how

three bar codes are scanned in sequence to do the following:
1.Place the scanner in Programming Mode (Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar
code).
2.Scan the Item Tag that will enable the new feature.
3.End the programming session and reset the scanner (Enter/Exit Programming
Mode bar code).
B. Sample B provides an example of a programming feature requiring the entry of a

range value. Like sample A, the scanner is placed in Programming Mode and an
Item Tag1 is scanned. Then, a value must be entered before ending the program-
ming session. In the example, three digits must be scanned from the number
pad in Appendix C. This type of format, requiring several bar codes, is necessary
to allow flexible programming for item values with larger numeric ranges.
Unless otherwise directed, item value settings (for example, label lengths)
are entered as decimal numbers. Only enter values as hexadecimal when
instructed to do so.
NOTE
C. The programming sequence shown in example C requires scanning of a single,

extended length bar code. This special programming bar code contains all the
data necessary to enter Programming Mode, set the Item Tag2 and Item Value,
and exit Programming Mode (all in one step).
1. Exception: If an interface bar code had been read while in Programming Mode, the scanner will operate on the default set-
tings for the new interface.
2. An “Item Tag” is a term used to describe an assigned number, which is encoded in a programming bar code, that toggles
(selects, enables, disables, etc.) a specific programming feature

Table 8. Programming Sequence
SET ITEM TAG ITEM VALUE END/RESET
1 2 3
A Enter/Exit
Programming
Mode
ENABLE
NEW FEATURE
Enter/Exit
Programming
Mode
1 2 345 6
0
B ENABLE NEW
FEATURE
USING THE
0
Enter/Exit Enter/Exit
Programming FOLLOWING Programming
Mode SETTINGS... 8 Mode
C 1
ONE BAR CODE CONTAINS ENTER + ITEM TAG + ITEM VALUE + EXIT

Programming
LED and Beeper Indicators

The scanner provides a set of indicators that verify/announce the various scanner
functions. See Appendix A for more details.
If You Make a Mistake...

If, during a programming session, you find that you are unsure of the scanner’s
settings or wish to reset the scanner’s configuration, use the Return to Factory
Settings label below to return the scanner’s configuration to the factory settings.
Scanning this label will also reset any changes made during previous programming
sessions.
Return to Factory Settings

Scan the bar code below to return the scanner to the default settings configured at
the factory for the currently active interface. This bar code is typically used to return
the scanner to a “known” operating state when the present programming status is
not known, faulty, or suspect.
Use this bar code with caution, since it will reset ALL features that may have
been programmed since the scanner’s installation.
CAUTION
DO NOT scan the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code before and after
scanning this bar code.
NOTE
RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS

Test Mode
Use this feature to place the scanner into a testing, or “demo” mode. This special
mode disables the scanner interface, meaning that bar code data is not sent out to
the host via the scanner interface. This allows the bar code to be scanned
continuously without requiring a response from the POS terminal.
Enable Test Mode — The scanner will scan labels and beep without sending data.
Disable Test Mode — The scanner will return to the original configuration before Test
Mode was entered.
DO NOT scan the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code before and after
scanning the bar codes on this page.
NOTE
TEST MODE = DISABLE
TEST MODE = ENABLE

Programming
NOTES

Chapter 8
Imaging and CSS Features
Imaging Features
The imaging features in this chapter pertain only to the imaging feature available via
the vertical window (or, optionally, the horizontal window) using the Image Capture
Button, as shown in Figure 52.
Figure 52. Imaging Capability
Image
Capture
Button

Enter/Exit Programming Mode
How to Capture an Image
Image Capture to the Host by Host Command

This feature is only available for RS-232 and USB COM interfaces.
If the USB COM interface has been selected, follow the instruc-
tions in the Interface Related Features chapter of this guide.
NOTE
The host command format is as follows:

P<cnt>pSBCIF
where:
P - ASCII 'P' used as preamble of pass-through commands
<cnt> - binary value of 6 indicating 6 bytes to follow
p - ASCII lowercase 'p' ; command to take a picture
S - size value of image as ASCII character
• ‘S’ == uses scanner's configuration value CI_IMAGE_SIZE
• ‘0’-VGA, (640X480)
• ‘1’-WVGA, (752X480)
• ‘2’-FVGA, (full 1024x1280 VGA)
• ‘3’-HVGA (half vga)
B - brightness value in ASCII
• ‘B’ == uses scanner's configuration value CI_IMAGE_BRIGHTNESS else ‘0’
thru’9’ specifies brightness
C - contrast value in ASCII
• ‘C’ == uses scanner configuration value CI_IMAGE_CONTRAST else ‘0’ thru’9’
specifies contrast
I - imager selection
• ‘V’ == vertical
• ‘H’ == horizontal
F - format of image
• ‘J == jpeg
• ‘M’ == bmp (bitmap)
• ‘T’ == tiff
• ‘B’ == binary
IF the image is of a type the scanner supports, capture and transmission occurs, and
the command is of proper format
THEN

The scanner will transmit an ACK (0x06) to the Host in response to this command.
The image data transmission starts with a 4 byte binary field representing (Big
Endian) number of bytes to follow.
If the “number of bytes to follow” value is zero, there was a problem with generating
the image and the request should be retried.
ELSE
The scanner will transmit a BEL (0x07) to the Host in response to this command.
ENDIF

Image Camera
This option selects the default imager for picture taking (optional camera
functionality).
Choices are:
Vertical — Vertical window imager selected for taking pictures.
Horizontal — Horizontal window imager selected for taking pictures.
045D00(CR)
DEFAULT
Image Camera = Vertical
045D01(CR)
Image Camera = Horizontal

Image Format
This feature specifies the output format for images taken using the camera function
of the scanner.
Choices are:
• JPG
• BMP
• TIFF
03E900(CR)
DEFAULT
Image Format = JPG
03E901(CR)
Image Format = BMP
03E902(CR)
Image Format = TIFF

Image Size
This feature specifies the size of the captured image.
Choices are:
VGA — Video Graphics Array. 640 x 480 pixels.
WVGA — Wide Video Graphics Array, various physical sizes, 16:9 shape
Full Size — Maximum image height and width. Largest image.
Half VGA — Half of the size of a regular VGA image, 320 x 240 pixels. Smallest image.
03EA00(CR)
DEFAULT
Image Size = VGA
03EA01(CR)
Image Size = WVGA
03EA02(CR)
Image Size = Full Size
03EA03(CR)
Image Size = Half VGA

Image Brightness
Specifies the image brightness value. The selectable range is from 0 to 10, with 10
being the brightest.
03EB00(CR)
DEFAULT
Image Brightness = 0
03EB01(CR)
03EB02(CR)
03EB03(CR)
03EB04(CR)
03EB05(CR)
03EB06(CR)
03EB07(CR)

Image Brightness — continued
03EB08(CR)
03EB09(CR)
03EB0A(CR)

Image Contrast
This feature sets the contrast level for a captured image. The selectable range is from
0 to 10, with 0 being the lowest and 10 being the highest contrast.
03EC00(CR)
DEFAULT
Image Contrast = 0
03EC01(CR)
Image Contrast = 1
03EC02(CR)
Image Contrast = 2
03EC03(CR)
Image Contrast = 3
03EC04(CR)
Image Contrast = 4
03EC05(CR)
Image Contrast = 5
03EC06(CR)
Image Contrast = 6
03EC07(CR)
Image Contrast = 7

Image Contrast — continued
03EC08(CR)
Image Contrast = 8
03EC09(CR)
Image Contrast = 9
03EC0A(CR)
Image Contrast = 10

Image Compression
Specifies the starting image compression factor.
03ED05(CR)
Image Compression = 5
03ED0A(CR)
03ED19(CR)
03ED32(CR)
03ED46(CR)
03ED50(CR)
03ED5A(CR)
03ED64(CR)
DEFAULT

CSS Features
The Customer Service Scanner (CSS) is an optional scanning unit with which your
scanner may be equipped. The following options are available for the CSS:
CSS Button Option

The scanner’s EAS/CSS button can be programmed for use by the sales associate to
activate or deactivate the CSS using that button. This allows the associate to control
when customers are able to scan bar codes in the following manner:
CSS Button Option Enabled — Depending upon its current state, the CSS function can be
turned OFF or ON by a momentary press of the EAS/CSS button.
The CSS will be turned ON automatically on power up.
NOTE
If the CSS Button Option is enabled simultaneously when the features EAS
Mode on page 158 and EAS Exception Button on page 165 are enabled, prece-
dence is given to the CSS function. A momentary button push will activate
the CSS, while a one-second button push is required to activate the EAS
NOTE Exception function.
CSS Button Option Disabled — When this feature is disabled, a connected CSS is always
ON, and is not effected by a push of the EAS/CSS button.
05B100(CR)
DEFAULT
CSS Button Option = Disable
05B101(CR)
CSS Button Option = Enable

Chapter 9
General Scanner and Scale Features
1D Double Read Timeout
The 1D Double Read Timeout feature specifies the minimum allowable time which must pass
before reading the same 1D label again (e.g. two identical items in succession).
To set the Double Read Timeout:
1. Scan the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused
bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar
code.
If the incidence of multiple reads is not acceptable, increase the Double Read
Timeout setting to a higher value.
NOTE
004D1E(CR)
1D Double Read Timeout = 300ms
004D28(CR)
DEFAULT
004D3C(CR)
004D50(CR)

2D Double Read Timeout

The 2D Double Read Timeout feature specifies the minimum allowable time which must pass
before reading the same 2D label again (e.g. two identical items in succession).
To set this feature:
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the Enter/Exit Programming

Mode bar code.
If the incidence of multiple reads is not acceptable, increase the Timeout set-
ting to a higher value.
NOTE
03DF1E(CR)
03DF28(CR)
03DF3C(CR)
03DF46(CR)
DEFAULT
03DF50(CR)

Digital Watermark (DWM) Enable

Enables/Disables the ability of the scanner to decode Digital Watermarks.

Mode bar code.
The Digital Watermark feature must be enabled for decode functionality.
NOTE
049000(CR)
Digital Watermark (DWM) = Disable

049001(CR)
DEFAULT
Digital Watermark (DWM) = Enable

Digitally Watermarked (DWM) Double Read Timeout

Specifies the minimum allowable time which must pass before reading the same Digitally
Watermarked (DWM) label again (e.g. two identical items in succession).
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the Enter/Exit Programming Mode
bar code.
If the incidence of multiple reads is not acceptable, increase the Double Read
Timeout setting to a higher value.
NOTE
00521E(CR)
DWM Double Read Timeout = 0.3 Seconds
005228(CR)
005232(CR)
DEFAULT
005246(CR)
005264(CR)
DWM Double Read Timeout = 1 Second

Label Gone Timeout

Specifies the amount of time in cycles (one cycle = 25ms) that data segments are
stored by the software before being discarded if a label has not been successfully
decoded during the current “label in volume session,” which is defined as the time
between when the label gone time is first started until the label gone timer expires.
This only applies to UPC/EAN labels when segment assembly is enabled.
NOTE
To set the Label Gone Timeout:
bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code.
004C10(CR)
DEFAULT
Label Gone Timeout = 0.4 Seconds
004C18(CR)
004C20(CR)
004C30(CR)
004C40(CR)

Sleep Mode Timer

This feature specifies the amount of time of inactivity (with no label reads) before the
scanner enters sleep mode.
2. Scan the bar code, Set Sleep Mode Timer below. You’ll need to cover any unused
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the Keypad in Appendix C that represent the
desired time interval. The selectable range is 000-255 in 15 second increments.
Pad all numbers with leading zeros to yield a three-digit entry (000-255).
4. Scan the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code to exit Programming Mode.
03AF(CR)
Set Sleep Mode Timer
Default setting for this feature is: 5 minutes

DEFAULT

1D Inverse Read Control

This configuration item is used to toggle inverted label reading for 1D bar codes, for
example, a label printed as white on black as opposed to black on white.

Mode bar code.
032D00(CR)
DEFAULT
1D Inverse Read Control = Disable
032D01(CR)
1D Inverse Read Control = Enable

2D Inverse Read Control

This configuration item is used to toggle inverted label reading for 2D bar codes, for
example, a label printed as white on black as opposed to black on white.
Mode bar code.
040C00(CR)
DEFAULT
2D Inverse Read Control = Disable
040C01(CR)
2D Inverse Read Control = Enable
Illumination Control
This feature allows illumination to be turned off when the scanner is disabled.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below:
Disable = Illumination remains on during the time the scanner is disabled.
Enable = Illumination turns off during the time the scanner is disabled.

Mode bar code.
063A00(CR)
Illumination Control = Disable

063A01(CR)
DEFAULT
Illumination Control = Enable

2D Contrast Improvement
This feature enables / disables the scanner’s ability to enhance the image contrast for
scanned 2D symbologies.

Mode bar code.
040F00(CR)
DEFAULT
2D Contrast Improvement = Disable
040F01(CR)
2D Contrast Improvement = Enable

Good Read LED Idle State

This feature specifies the state of the green scanner LEDs when the scanner is idle
and ready to read a label. Options are:
• Off
• On dim
To set the Scanner LEDs Idle State:

Mode bar code.
030101(CR)
Scanner LED Idle State = Off
030102(CR)
DEFAULT
Scanner LED Idle State = On Dim

Good Read Lamp Color

Determines the color for the good read indicator.
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT Programming Mode bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, Set Good Read Lamp Color below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads
only the bar code you intend to scan.
desired Good Read Lamp Color as listed below:
- RED = 800000
- GREEN = 008000
- BLUE = 000080
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT Program-

ming Mode bar code.
0464(CR)
Set Good Read Lamp Color
Default setting for this feature = 008000 (GREEN)

DEFAULT

Scanner Control Button Options

Configure the Scanner Control Button to one of the following modes of operation:
• Enable all functions: Volume, tone, diagnostics and reset.
• Enable only volume, tone and reset.
• Enable reset only.
• Disable all button functions
To set the desired Scanner Control Button Option:

Mode bar code.
05AF00(CR)
Scanner Control Button = Enable All Functions
05AF01(CR)
DEFAULT
Scanner Control Button = Enable Only Volume Tone and
Reset
05AF02(CR)
Scanner Control Button = Enable Reset Only
05AF03(CR)
Scanner Control Button = Disable All Functions

Power-up Tone Control

Specifies the type of audible indication that is made when entering scanner-active
mode on power-up. Choices are:
• No tone
• Play tone
To set the Power-up tone:

Mode bar code.
020700(CR)
Power-up Tone Control = No Tone
020701(CR)
DEFAULT
Power-up Tone Control = Play Tone

Good Read Beep Control

This feature enables/disables scanner beep upon successfully decoding of a label.

Mode bar code.
006700(CR)
Good Read Beep Control = Disable
006701(CR)
DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Control = Enable

Good Read Beep Frequency

Adjusts the scanner’s good read beep to sound at low, medium, or high frequency
(controls the beeper’s pitch/tone).
• Low
• Medium
• High

Mode bar code.
001400(CR)
Good Read Beep Frequency = Low
001401(CR)
DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Frequency = Medium
001402(CR)
Good Read Beep Frequency = High

Good Read Beep Length

Specifies the duration of a good read beep.
2. Scan the bar code, Set Good Read Beep Length. You’ll need to cover any unused
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the
desired good read beep length setting. The selectable range is 1-255, which is
the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Times have a tolerance of +/-25%. Pad
all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit
entry (001-255).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate
amount of digits have been scanned.
0016(CR)
Set Good Read Beep Length
Default setting for this feature is:

DEFAULT 008 - 80ms

Good Read Beep Volume

Selects the beeper volume upon a good read beep. There are five selectable volumes,
with each volume increment adding approximately five decibels to the previous level:
• Low • Medium High

• Medium Low • High
• Medium

2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes
on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar
code.
001900(CR)
Good Read Beep Volume = Low
001901(CR)
Good Read Beep Volume = Medium Low
001902(CR)
DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Volume = Medium
001903(CR)
Good Read Beep Volume = Medium High
001904(CR)
Good Read Beep Volume = High

Good Read When to Indicate

This feature specifies when the scanner will provide indication (beep and/or flash its
green LEDs) upon successfully reading a bar code.
• Good Read = Indicate after decode1
• Good Read = Indicate after transmit
• Good Read = Indicate after CTS goes inactive, then active2
• Good Read = Indicate after each output structure proofed3
To set the Good Read When to Indicate feature:
2. Scan the desired mode bar code from those provided below You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the

Mode bar code.
009900(CR)
DEFAULT
Good Read When to Indicate = After Decode
009901(CR)
Good Read When to Indicate = After Transmit
009902(CR)
Good Read When to Indicate = After CTS goes Inactive,

Then Active
009903(CR)
Good Read When to Indicate = After Each Output

Structure Proofed
1. For scanner models having intelligent integrated EAS, label transmission (and hence the good read beep) is completed after
the EAS logic executes.
2. The “Indicate after CTS goes inactive...” mode applies to RS-232 STD and RS-232 WN interfaces only. If set to this mode in
other interfaces, “Indicate after decode” mode will be implemented.
3. When beeping after each output structure decoded, if there are multiple output structures, there is a delay after the beep has
finished. This delay is equal to the Good Read Beep Length.

Scale Zero Button and Scale Indicator LED

Here are the configurable options for the Scale Zero Button and Scale Indicator LED:
• Scale Zero Button and Scale Indicator LED active
• Scale Indicator LED active
• Scale Zero Button active
• Scale Zero Button and Scale Indicator LED disconnected
The options on this page are for adaptive scale bonnet integration only.
NOTE
2. Scan the desired mode bar code from those provided below You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the

Mode bar code.
06F100(CR)
Scale Zero Button and Scale Indicator LED = Scale Zero

Button and Scale Indicator LED active
06F101(CR)
Scale Zero Button and Scale Indicator LED = Scale Indi-

cator LED active
06F102(CR)
Scale Zero Button and Scale Indicator LED =

Scale Zero Button active
06F103(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Zero Button and Scale Indicator LED = Scale Zero
Button and Scale Indicator LED disconnected

Scale Sentry
This option enables or disables the ability of the scanner to monitor items placed on
the platter to ensure they are not overhanging non-weighing surfaces. See the topic
Scale SentryTM Option in the Introduction chapter for more information.

ming Mode bar code.
045000(CR)
Scale Sentry = Disable
045001(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Sentry = Enable

Scale Sentry Override Button

This option allows a press of the Scale Sentry Override Button to manually clear a
Scale Sentry event.

ming Mode bar code.
046300(CR)
Scale Sentry Override Button = Disable
046301(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Sentry Override Button = Enable

Scale Sentry Mode

Specifies the operating mode for Scale Sentry.

ming Mode bar code.
04C000(CR)
Scale Sentry Mode = Disable
04C001(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Sentry Mode = Enable

Scale Sentry Visual Indicator

Sets the Red, Green, Blue values for the Scale Sentry visual indicator.
2. Scan the bar code, Set Color Scale Sentry Visual Indicator below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scan-
ner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
desired Scale Sentry Visual Indicator Color as listed below:
- DISABLED = 000000
- RED = 800000
- GREEN = 008000
- BLUE = 000080

ming Mode bar code.
04C2(CR)
Set Color Scale Sentry Visual Indicator
Default setting for this feature = 000080 (BLUE)

DEFAULT

Scale Sentry Beep Enable

Enables/disables the beep indication for Scale Sentry.

ming Mode bar code.
04C100(CR)
Scale Sentry Beep = Disable
04C101(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Sentry Beep = Enable

Scale Sentry GRI Enable

Enables/Disables use of good read indicator for scale sentry indications.

ming Mode bar code.
047300(CR)
Scale Sentry GRI = Disable
047301(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Sentry GRI = Enable

Scale Sentry Adaptive Scale Indication State

Defines the indication state of the adaptive Scale Sentry output pin.

ming Mode bar code.
04CE00(CR)
Scale Sentry Adaptive Scale

Indication State = Active Low
04CE01(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Sentry Adaptive Scale
Indication State = Active High

Scale Enable
Use this feature to enable or disable scale operation.
Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding scale functional-

ity. Consult your local Weights and Measures authority.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
044F00(CR)
Scale = Disable
044F01(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale = Enable

Scale Diagnostics Mode

Use this feature to allow or disallow the ability of an operator to initiate the advanced
feature, scale diagnostics.

Mode bar code.
049F00(CR)
Scale Diagnostics Mode = Disable
049F01(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Diagnostics Mode = Enable

Scale Stale Weight Timeout

This option specifies the amount of time that scale data is presented to the host
before being discarded.
2. Scan the bar code, Set Scale Stale Weight Timeout below. You’ll need to cover any
desired time interval. The selectable range is 20-33 in 10ms increments.
Scan the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code to exit Programming Mode.
0452(CR)
Set Scale Stale Weight Timeout
Default setting for this feature is: 21

DEFAULT (330 milliseconds)

Scale Enforced Zero Return

This feature sets the mode of enforcing the scale re-zeroing operation:
• Disable
• Non-zero for more than 4 minutes OR below zero
• Non-zero for more than 4 minutes OR below zero OR no zero between weights
bar code you intend to scan. The strategy is to select the lowest possible filter
level needed that allows normal scale operation.

Mode bar code.
040800(CR)
Scale Enforced Zero Return = Disable
040801(CR)
Scale Enforced Zero Return = Non Zero for More Than 4

minutes OR Below Zero
040802(CR)
Scale Enforced Zero Return = Non Zero for More Than

4 minutes OR Below Zero OR No Zero Between
Weights
040803(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Enforced Zero Return = Non Zero for 4 minutes

Scale Interface Type

Use this feature to select the scale interface type. Choices are:.
• No scale interface
• IBM 46XX (Port 17 ignored)
• Mettler Toledo 8217
• USB (IBM ignored)
• RS-232 - SASI
• RS-232 - ICL
• USB (HID weighing device ignored)
• RS-232 (Single Cable ignored)

Mode bar code.
040400(CR)
Scale Interface Type = No Scale Interface
040401(CR)
Scale Interface Type = IBM 46XX (Port 17 Ignored)
040402(CR)
Scale Interface Type = Mettler Toledo (8217 ignored)
040403(CR)
Scale Interface Type = USB (IBM ignored)

Scale Interface Type (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
040404(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Interface Type = RS-232 - SASI
040405(CR)
Scale Interface Type = RS-232 - ICL
040406(CR)
Scale Interface Type = USB (HID Weighing Device

Ignored)
040407(CR)
Scale Interface Type = RS-232 (Single Cable Ignored)

ICL Scale Interface DC1 Character Delay

When using the RS-232 ICL scale interface type, this option enables/disables the
ability of the scanner to delay DC1 response for 40 milliseconds.

Mode bar code.
048B00(CR)
DEFAULT
ICL Scale Interface DC1 Character Delay = Disable
048B01(CR)
ICL Scale Interface DC1 Character Delay = Enable

Scale Calibration Notification

This option enables a notification that scale calibration has taken place.

Mode bar code.
033700(CR)
DEFAULT
Scale Calibration Notification = Disable
033701(CR)
Scale Calibration Notification = Enable

Scale Intercharacter Delay

With regard to scale functions, this feature specifies a delay between the end of one
character and the beginning of the next in 10-millisecond increments.
To set the Scale Intercharacter Delay:
2. Scan the bar code below, Set Scale Intercharacter Delay. You’ll need to cover any
desired delay. The selectable range is 0-255, which is the delay in 10-millisecond
increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield
a three-digit entry (000-255).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
041A(CR)
Set Scale Intercharacter Delay

DEFAULT 00 - No Intercharacter Delay

Adaptive Scale LED Option

Defines which LED is used for adaptive scale indication.

ming Mode bar code.
04CF00(CR)
DEFAULT
Adaptive Scale LED Option = Zero LED
04CF01(CR)
Adaptive Scale LED Option = Scale Sentry LED

Remote Display — Enable/Disable

The scanning-scale can be configured to operate with or without a Remote Display.
Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding a Remote Display.
Consult your local Weights and Measures authority.
If this feature is enabled the scanner will expect that it is connected to a

NOTE Remote Display, and will indicate an error if one is not. See Error Codes in the
Problem Isolation section for more information.

Mode bar code.
040300(CR)
Remote Display = Disable
040301(CR)
DEFAULT
Remote Display = Enable

Auxiliary Port Mode

Selects the usage for the scanner’s optional auxiliary port. The choices listed below
are mutually exclusive (only one option can be active at a time).
• Disabled — Port is inactive
• External Handheld Input — Supports DatalogicTM handheld scanners (Quick-
ScanTM 1000, QuickScanTM 6000, PowerScanTM) as well as other models such as
the Symbol® HotShot. Call your dealer for more information about supported
devices.
Cable pinout information for the Aux Port is provided in Appendix B of this
manual. A connected handheld scanner must be configured to transmit data
as outlined in Appendix D.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
050900(CR)
Auxiliary Port Mode = Disable
050901(CR)
DEFAULT
Auxiliary Port Mode = External Handheld Input

Auxiliary USB Mode

This option specifies the function of the USB auxiliary port.

Mode bar code.
051700(CR)
DEFAULT
Auxiliary USB Mode = Disable
051701(CR)
Auxiliary USB Mode = PIR/CT Output + Diagnostics

Reporting

USB Device Port Location

Chooses USB device port location (under scale platter or on back panel).

Mode bar code.
048700(CR)
DEFAULT
USB Device Port Location = Topside Connector
048701(CR)
USB Device Port Location = Rear Panel Connector

Productivity Index Reporting (PIR) / Cashier Training (CT)

When PIR/CT is enabled, label quality data is appended to decoded data before being
presented to the POS. The PIR feature allows the scanner to provide information to an
external computer indicating how easy the label was to read. CT allows the scanner to
provide feedback to the cashier on how to scan in a more ergonomic fashion.

Mode bar code.
04FE00(CR)
DEFAULT
PIR / CT = Disable
04FE01(CR)
PIR / CT = Enable

PIR/CT Auxiliary Port Baud Rate

This feature specifies the baud rate of the auxiliary port when operating in PIR/CT
Mode.
This setting is valid ONLY when Auxiliary Port Mode is set to PIR/CT +
Diagnostics Reporting.
NOTE
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
051604(CR)
PIR/CT Auxiliary Port Baud Rate = 1200
051603(CR)
051602(CR)
051601(CR)
051600(CR)
DEFAULT
051606(CR)

PIR/CT Auxiliary Port Baud Rate — continued
051607(CR)
051608(CR)

NOTES

Chapter 10
EAS Features
EAS Features — Sensormatic
These features control the Sensormatic® AMB-9010 or ScanMaxPro EAS con-

troller box. This orderable option is installed at the time of manufacture. See
EAS Features — Checkpoint on page 172 to set options for the Checkpoint®
EAS system.
NOTE

EAS Mode
This controls the mode of operation for interfacing with the Sensormatic®AMB-9010
or ScanMaxPro EAS controller box. Choices are:
• Disabled = EAS deactivation turned off.
• Coupled Mode = EAS tag is deactivated only upon successful scanning of an
item’s bar code or via EAS Exception Button.
If the CSS Button Option on page 112 is enabled simultaneously with the EAS
Exception Button, precedence is given to the CSS function. A momentary but-
ton push will activate the CSS, while a one-second button push is required to
activate the EAS Exception function.
NOTE
• Decoupled Mode = EAS deactivation is performed independently of bar code
scanning.
• Hybrid Mode = EAS system is armed whenever the scanner is enabled and the
deactivation beep is sounded when an EAS tag is deactivated.
• Host Coupled Mode = Fundamental controls and notification of various EAS
events are provided to the POS system.
Deactivation can only be initiated manually if the EAS Exception Button is

armed to do so. Reference the feature EAS Exception Button on page 165 for
more information.
NOTE
ton push will activate the CSS, while a one-second button push is required to
NOTE

Mode bar code.

EAS Mode (continued)

058000(CR)
DEFAULT
EAS Mode = Disable
058001(CR)
EAS Mode = Coupled Mode
058002(CR)
EAS Mode = Decoupled Mode
058003(CR)
EAS Mode = Hybrid Mode
058004(CR)
EAS Mode = Host Coupled Mode

EAS Notification
This feature specifies the output mode and activation of EAS event notification when
operating in Coupled Mode.

Mode bar code.
058800(CR)
DEFAULT
EAS Notification = Disable
058801(CR)
EAS Notification = Notification over POS Port

EAS Security Level

This feature defines the level of EAS security for operating in coupled mode.

Mode bar code.
058900(CR)
EAS Security Level = Low
058901(CR)
DEFAULT
EAS Security Level = Medium
058902(CR)
EAS Security Level = High

EAS Good Beep Mode

This feature sets the mode of operation for the EAS deactivation beep while operating
in coupled mode.

Mode bar code.
058A00(CR)
DEFAULT
EAS Good Beep Mode = Disable
058A01(CR)
EAS Good Beep Mode = Beep on Deactivate
058A02(CR)
EAS Good Beep Mode = Beep on Verify

EAS Beep Duration

Sets the duration of the EAS successful deactivation beep, specified in 10ms
increments. The beep only occurs if EAS mode is not disabled.
To set the EAS Beep Duration:
2. Scan the bar code, Set EAS Beep Duration below. You’ll need to cover any unused
desired EAS Beep Duration. The selectable range is 0-255, which is the timeout
in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with lead-
ing zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-255).
Examples:
000 = EAS beep disabled
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the nter/Exit Programming

Mode bar code.
0581(CR)
Set EAS Beep Duration

DEFAULT 008 - 80ms

EAS Retry Count

This feature sets the number of times the deactivation sequence (defined by the
feature, “EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry ”) is restarted after a failed deactivation
attempt.
2. Scan the bar code, Set EAS Retry Count below. You’ll need to cover any unused
desired number. The selectable range is 0-15 resets. Pad all single and double
digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a two-digit entry (00-15).
A setting of zero specifies no deactivation retries upon failed deactivation

attempt.
NOTE
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the nter/Exit Programming

Mode bar code.
0583(CR)
Set EAS Retry Count

DEFAULT 03 - Retry EAS Deactivation three times

EAS Exception Button

This feature is for use in Coupled Mode1. When it is enabled, EAS deactivation can be
manually initiated by placing the item with the EAS tag downstream2 of the
horizontal scan window and pushing the EAS Exception Push Button momentarily.
The scanner emits a clicking sound while in deactivation state.
Duration of deactivation state is determined by the feature, EAS Deactivation

Duration — Manual.
NOTE
ton push will activate/deactivate the CSS, while a one-second button push is
required to activate the EAS Exception function.
NOTE
Options are:
• DISABLE — EAS Exception Button is disabled.
• ENABLE ALWAYS —The EAS Exception Button is always enabled.
• ENABLE ONLY WHEN SCANNER ENABLED — The EAS Exception Button is only
available when the scanner is enabled and running.
Statistics are collected each time the EAS Exception Button is used to deacti-
vate an EAS tag.
NOTE
1. See EAS Mode on page 158 for more information about Coupled Mode.
2. “Downstream” in this case is defined as being the downstream side of the scan window from the direction of product flow, or
scanning direction.

EAS Exception Button — cont.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code.
058400(CR)
EAS Exception Button = Disabled
058401(CR)
EAS Exception Button = Enable Always
058402(CR)
DEFAULT
EAS Exception Button = Enable ONLY When Scanner
Enabled

EAS Deactivation Duration — Coupled

Specifies the amount of time EAS deactivation is operative once the function has been
initiated following a bar code read.
This setting pertains only to units configured for EAS Coupled Mode. Refer-
ence the EAS Mode description for more information about Coupled and
Decoupled EAS operation.
NOTE
To set the EAS Deactivation Duration — Coupled:
2. Scan the bar code, Set EAS Deactivation Duration — Coupled below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
desired duration. The selectable range is 1-255, which is the duration in 10-milli-
second increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes
to yield a three-digit entry (001-255).
Examples:
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
0585(CR)
Set EAS Deactivation Duration — Coupled

DEFAULT 28 = 400ms

EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry

Specifies the amount of time EAS deactivation is operative once the function has been
initiated following EAS tag detection (prior to bar code read).
Decoupled EAS operation. Also reference EAS Retry Count.
NOTE
To set the EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry:
2. Scan the bar code, Set EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry below. You’ll need to
Examples:
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
0586(CR)
Set EAS Deactivation Duration — Retry

DEFAULT 32 -500ms

EAS Deactivation Duration — Exception

Specifies the amount of time EAS deactivation is operative upon pushing the EAS
Exception Button.
Decoupled EAS operation. Also reference EAS Retry Count.
NOTE
To set the EAS Deactivation Duration — Exception:
2. Scan the bar code, Set EAS Deactivation Duration — Exception below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
Examples:
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
0587(CR)
Set EAS Deactivation Duration — Exception

DEFAULT 64 - 1 Second

EAS Pre-Read Time

This feature specifies the time duration that must elapse before reading a label once
an EAS tag is sensed.
2. Scan the bar code, Set EAS Pre-Read Time below. You’ll need to cover any
desired duration. The selectable range is 000-255, which is the duration in 10-
millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading
zeros to yield a three-digit entry (000-255).
Examples:
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
0582(CR)
Set EAS Pre-Read Time

DEFAULT 19 = 250ms

EAS Error Tones

Enable or disable error tones when deactivation fails.

Mode bar code.
06F000(CR)
EAS Error Tones = Disable
06F001(CR)
DEFAULT
EAS Error Tones = Enable

EAS Features — Checkpoint

The features in this section apply only to Checkpoint® EAS systems. See EAS Features
— Sensormatic on page 157 to set options for that system.
ERI Active State

Specifies the active state polarity of ERI; the inactive state is its opposite polarity. ERI
output goes active during the good read of a bar code, allowing the EAS device to
deactivate a tag on the product.
To set the ERI Active State:

Mode bar code.
00F900(CR)
DEFAULT
ERI Active State = Active Low
00F901(CR)
ERI Active State = Active High

ERI Timeout
Specifies the amount of time that an ERI signal is held in its active state for a good
read.
To set the ERI Timeout:
2. Scan the bar code, Set ERI Timeout below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
second increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeros
Examples:
000 = ERI timeout disabled
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
A setting of 0 (000) disables this feature.
NOTE
00FA(CR)
Set ERI Timeout

DEFAULT 002 -20ms

EAS Features
NOTES

Chapter 11
Interface Related Features
Interface Type
Specifies the current scanner interface. Selections are:
INTERFACE (I/F) I/F I.D.
TYPE NUMBERa
RS-232 Standard 05
RS-232 Wincor-Nix-
12
dorf
RS-232 Single Cable 20
USB OEM 45
IBM Port 17 04
IBM Port 5B 08
IBM Port 9B 23
USB Keyboard 35
USB-TEC 0D
USB COM 47
NOT USER-SELECTABLE
7-segment FRU
display indi-
cates 0 at start-
System Interface up (accompa-
nied by trill beep
for approx. 2
seconds)
a. To access a scanner’s interface identification number, place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic
Mode and view the 7-segment FRU display (reference Chapter 2, "Diagnostic Modes", for more
information).

A new scanner may have been shipped from the factory with a Null Interface
(no interface type selected) to ensure system compatibility at installation. In
this case, the correct Interface Type programming bar code must be scanned
first before the scanner can be used with a POS system.
NOTE
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface
configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session.
(Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to the fac-
tory default for that interface type.)
NOTE
To select the desired interface:
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change
to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the
host cable DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION
When an interface is selected, the scanner loads the configuration for that
interface as the selection is made. Any custom configurations done in the
previous interface will not be carried over to the configuration for the new
interface.
NOTE
1. Disconnect current interface cable(s) if currently connected.
3. Scan the bar code representing the appropriate interface located on the follow-
ing pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes adjacent to and on any fac-
ing pages to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Mode bar code.
Once the correct interface has been set, it will be necessary to proceed to the
appropriate pages in this manual that select parameters and options for that
interface. For example, if RS-232 is selected, turn to the pages in this manual
headed as features specific to the RS-232 interface.
NOTE
5. Connect new interface cable(s).

RS-232 Interface Selection

CAUTION
000105(CR)
Interface Type = RS-232 Standard
000112(CR)
Interface Type = RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf
Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port.
The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.
NOTE
000120(CR)
Interface Type = RS-232 Single Cable

USB Interface Selection

CAUTION
NOTE
000145(CR)
Interface Type = USB OEM
00010D(CR)
Interface Type = USB TEC
000147(CR)
Interface Type = USB COM

IBM Interface Selection

CAUTION
NOTE
000104(CR)
Interface Type = IBM Port 17
000108(CR)
Interface Type = IBM Port 5B
000123(CR)
Interface Type = IBM 4683 Port 9B

Keyboard Interface Selection

CAUTION
000135(CR)
Interface Type = USB Keyboard

Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length

Specifies the maximum number of data characters allowed in messages transmitted
to the host.
To set the Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length:
2. Scan the bar code, Set Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
desired maximum host-transmitted message length. The selectable range is 0-
249 data characters. (Labels that are longer than this length are not read.) Pad
all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit
entry (000-249).
If this configuration item is set to 0 (000), there is no general length limit

imposed on data being transmitted to the host.
NOTE
06B1(CR)
Set Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length

DEFAULT 000 - No general limit imposed

IBM Features
IBM Interface Options

IBM interfaces offer specific control over interaction with certain devices.
The USB OEM interface provides its own set of options. Refer to
the feature, USB OEM Interface Options, in this section.
NOTE
Options for this feature are as follows:
• FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner and scale configuration host
commands.
• Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale — Ignores all scanner
and scale configuration host commands.

Mode bar code.
055000(CR)
DEFAULT
IBM Interface Option = Full Host Interface Support
055006(CR)
IBM Interface Option = Ignore Host I/F Config of Scan-

ner & Scale

IBM Scale Address
This feature applies to IBM Port 17 ONLY.
NOTE
Specifies IBM scale address for IBM Port 17. The following three addresses are
available:
• 6A
• 6B
• 6E
To set the IBM Scale Address:
2. Scan the bar code below that represents the desired scale address designation.

Mode bar code.
04156A(CR)
IBM Scale Address = 6A
04156B(CR)
IBM Scale Address = 6b
04156E(CR)
DEFAULT
IBM Scale Address = 6E

IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format

This feature enables/disables scanner's ability to set a symbology identifier for a
specified label to Code 39 before transmitting that label data to an IBM host. This
applies to: Code 128, Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 5B; Code 93 and Codabar for
IBM Port 9B; Code 128, Code 93 and Codabar for OEM-USB.
When enabled, this feature has no effect on

IBM Port 17.
NOTE
To enable/disable the IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format feature:
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused

Mode bar code.
027200(CR)
DEFAULT
IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format = Disable
027201(CR)
IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format = Enable

46XX Number of Host Resets

This setting specifies the number of consecutive resets before entering label
Programming Mode to allow scanner configuration.
2. Scan the bar code, Set 46XX Number of Host Resets below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
desired number of resets. The selectable range is 01-15 data characters. Pad all
single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-15).
4. Scan the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code to exit Programming Mode.
0330(CR)
Set 46XX Number of Host Resets
Default setting for this feature is: 06 (six resets)

DEFAULT

46XX Label Slicing Control

This feature enables slicing of IBM 46XX host data into multiple pieces when a label is
longer than the length specified by the feature 46XX Maximum Label Slice Length.

ming Mode bar code.
06B000(CR)
46XX Label Slicing Control = Send Data in One Piece
06B001(CR)
DEFAULT
46XX Label Slicing Control = Slice Data Into Multiple
Pieces if Necessary

46XX Maximum Label Slice Length

This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of host transmitted data in each
SDLC frame.
This setting only applies when 46XX Label Slicing Control is enabled.
NOTE
2. Scan the bar code, Set 46XX Maximum Label Slice Length. You’ll need to cover
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the
desired length setting. The selectable range is 001-246 (a setting of 000 indi-
cates no length limitation). Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading
zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-246).

ming Mode bar code.
06B2(CR)
Set 46XX Maximum Label Slice Length

DEFAULT 040 - 64 Characters

USB OEM Interface Options

The OEM-USB interface offers specific control over interaction with certain devices.
Options for this feature are as follows:
• FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner and scale configuration host
commands.
• Compatible with Magellan SL host interface support — Uses Magellan SL host
interface support.
• Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale — Ignores all scanner
and scale configuration host commands.
This feature applies only to the USB OEM interface.

For other IBM interfaces, refer to the feature, IBM
Interface Options, earlier in this section.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
055000(CR)
USB OEM Interface Options = Full Interface Support
055001(CR)
USB OEM Interface Options = Compatible with Magellan

SL Host Interface Support
055007(CR)
DEFAULT
USB OEM Interface Options = Ignore Host Interface
Configuration of Scanner and Scale

USB OEM Scanner Device Type

The OEM-USB protocol allows for the scanner to be identified as one of two different
types of bar code scanners. Depending on what other scanners you may already have
connected to a USB POS, you may need to change this setting to enable all scanners
to communicate. Options are:
• Table Top Scanner
• Handheld Scanner

Mode bar code.
050D00(CR)
DEFAULT
USB OEM Scanner Device Type = Table Top Scanner
050D01(CR)
USB OEM Scanner Device Type = Handheld Scanner

RS-232 Features
RS-232 Baud Rate

This feature selects the baud rate required for sending and receiving data.
Single cable interfaces are limited to Baud Rate

selections up to 19200. They cannot communicate
at Baud Rates of 38400 and up.
NOTE
To specify the RS-232 Baud Rate:
2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the immediately
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Mode bar code.
001D04(CR)
RS-232 Baud Rate = 1200
001D03(CR)
001D02(CR)
001D01(CR)
DEFAULT
001D00(CR)

RS-232 Baud Rate (continued)
001D06(CR)
001D07(CR)
001D08(CR)
001D09(CR)
001D0A(CR)
001D0B(CR)

RS-232 Number of Data Bits

Specifies number of data bits required for sending and receiving data.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Data Bit setting. You’ll need to

Mode bar code.
009B00(CR)
RS-232 Number of Data Bits = 7
009B01(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Number of Data Bits = 8

RS-232 Number of Stop Bits

Specifies number of stop bits required for sending and receiving data.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Stop Bit setting. You’ll need to
cover any unused barc odes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scan-

Mode bar code.
002200(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits = 1
002201(CR)
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits = 2

RS-232 Parity
Specifies parity required for sending and receiving data.
Options for this setting are:
• RS-232 PARITY = NONE
• RS-232 PARITY = EVEN
• RS-232 PARITY = ODD
2. Scan the bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired Par-
ity setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as facing pages to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Mode bar code.
001F00(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Parity = None
001F01(CR)
RS-232 Parity = Even
001F02(CR)
RS-232 Parity = Odd

RS-232 Hardware Control

Enables/disables use of the RS-232 CTS signal for flow control and/or scan control.
Options are:
• Disable — The scanner transmits to the host regardless of any activity on the
CTS line.
• Enable CTS Flow Control — The CTS signal controls transmission of data to the host.
• Enable CTS Scan Control — The CTS line must be active for scanner to read and
transmit data. While the CTS line is inactive, scanner remains in a host- disabled
state; following a successful label transmission, the CTS signal must transition
to inactive and then to active to enable scanning for the next label.
• Enable Magellan SL CTS Scan Control — Follows the same hardware protocol as
older Magellan SL scanners.
2. Scan bar code below or from the following page for the desired setting. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner
Mode bar code.
020F00(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Hardware Control = Disable
020F01(CR)
RS-232 Hardware Control = Enable CTS Flow Control
020F02(CR)
RS-232 Parity = Enable CTS Scan Control
020F03(CR)
RS-232 Hardware Control = Enable MGL SL CTS Scan

Control

RS-232 Intercharacter Delay

Specifies delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next in 10-
millisecond increments.
To set the RS-232 Intercharacter Delay:
2. Scan the bar code below, Set RS-232 Intercharacter Delay. You’ll need to cover
desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the delay in 10-millisecond
increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield
a three-digit entry (000-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
009C(CR)
Set RS-232 Intercharacter Delay

DEFAULT 00 - No Intercharacter Delay

RS-232 Software Flow Control

Enables/disables RS-232 Flow Control using XON/ XOFF characters.
This item will be ignored when the feature, RS-232

NAK Character, is enabled
NOTE

Mode bar code.
002100(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Software Flow Control= Disable
002101(CR)
RS-232 Software Flow Control= Enable

RS-232 Ignore Host Commands

When set to ignore host commands, the scanner will ignore all host commands except
for the minimum set necessary to keep the interface active, transmit labels, and
transmit scale information. For normal operation of the interface, disable this feature.

Mode bar code.
04F400(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Ignore Host Commands = Don’t Ignore
04F401(CR)
RS-232 Ignore Host Commands = Ignore

RS-232 TTL
Specifies whether RS-232 interface provides TTL levels on the output pins TxD and
RTS.
Choices are:
• Normal RS-232 levels
• TTL levels
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature.

Mode bar code.
028500(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 TTL = Normal RS-232 levels
028501(CR)
RS-232 TTL = TTL Levels

RS-232 TTL Invert

Enables/disables inversion of TTL.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature.

Mode bar code.
06A100(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 TTL Invert = Disable
06A101(CR)
RS-232 TTL Invert = Enable

RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL

Enables/disables ability of scanner to beep (sound a good read tone) on receiving an
ASCII BEL (07 hex).
• Disable
• Enable
To enable/disable this feature:

Mode bar code.
069D00(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL = Disable
069D01(CR)
RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL = Enable

RS-232 Beep After Weigh

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to beep after weight data is transmitted to
the host. Scale interfaces that support this item are: RS-232 ICL, RS-232 SASI, and RS-
232 Single Cable.
To enable/disable the Beep After Weigh feature:

Mode bar code.
041C00(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Beep After Weigh = Disable
041C01(CR)
RS-232 Beep After Weigh = Enable

Beep on Not on File

Select for the host to beep (or not) when a not-on-file condition is detected by the
host. This feature is also applicable to single cable RS-232.
Options for this feature are:
• Muted (no beep will sound)
• Low Volume
• Medium Volume
• High Volume
To configure this feature:
2. Scan the bar code for the desired selection below. You’ll need to cover any

Mode bar code.
045100(CR)
RS-232 Beep on Not on File = Muted
045101(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Beep on Not on File = Low Volume
045102(CR)
RS-232 Beep on Not on File = Medium Volume
045103(CR)
RS-232 Beep on Not on File = High Volume

RS-232 ACK NAK Enable

This enables/disables the ability of the scanner to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK
protocol. When configured, the scanner and/or host sends an “ACK” when it receives
data properly, and sends “NAK” when the data is in error. Selections for this option
are:
• Disable ACK NAK
• Enable for Label Transmission — the scanner expects an ACK/NAK response
from the host when a label is sent)
• Enable for Host Acknowledgement — Enabled for Host Commands (the scanner
will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a command)
• Enable for Label & Host — Enabled for both Label Transmission & Host Com-
mand acknowledgement.
To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Enable:
2. Scan the desired option from bar codes below and on the following page. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that

Mode bar code.
061100(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 ACK NAK = Disable
061101(CR)
RS-232 ACK NAK = Enable for Label Transmission
061102(CR)
RS-232 ACK NAK = Enable for Host Acknowledgement
061103(CR)
RS-232 ACK NAK = Enable for Label & Host

RS-232 ACK Character

This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as an ACK character.
DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as
XON, XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal opera-
tion of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the fea-
ture, RS-232 Number of Data Bits, is set to 7 data bits.
NOTE
To specify the RS-232 ACK Character:
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK Character below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only
the bar code you intend to scan.
hex designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character
Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of
this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for the desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the desired ACK
character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1” (the ASCII corresponding hex
value).
amount of digits/characters have been scanned.
031F(CR)
Set RS-232 ACK Character

DEFAULT 06 - ACK

RS-232 NAK Character

This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as a NAK character.
DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as
XON, XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal opera-
tion of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the fea-
ture, RS-232 Number of Data Bits, is set to 7 data bits.
NOTE
To specify the RS-232 NAK Character:
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 NAK Character below. You’ll need to cover any
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the the Keypad in Appendix C that represent
the hex designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Char-
acter Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover
of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadeci-
mal digits for the desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the desired
NAK character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1” (the ASCII corresponding
hex value).
amount of digits/characters have been scanned.
0320(CR)
Set RS-232 NAK Character

DEFAULT 15 - NAK

RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout

This option specifies the action scanner performs on expiration of the RS-232 ACK
NAK Timeout Value.
Options are:
• Disable (transmission failure occurs)
• Enable (retry)

Mode bar code.
032100(CR)
RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout = Disable
032101(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout = Enable

RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value

This item specifies the time the scanner will wait for an ACK character from the host
following a label transmission.
• 0 = Infinite timeout
• 1 - 75 = Timeout in 200-millisecond increments
To set the ACK NAK Timeout Value:
2. Scan the bar code below, Set RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value. You’ll need to
desired timeout. A setting of 0 specifies an infinite timeout. The remaining
selectable range is 1-75, which is the timeout in 200-millisecond increments.
Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-75).
Examples:
00 = Infinite timeout
01 = 200ms
05 = 1,000ms (1 second)
40 = 8,000ms (8 seconds)
75 = 15,000ms (15 seconds)

The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount
of digits have been scanned.
0606(CR)
Set RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value

DEFAULT 01 - 200ms

RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count

This feature sets the number of times for the scanner to retry a label transmission
under a retry condition.
To set the RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count:
2. Scan the bar code, Set RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count below. You’ll need to cover
desired number. The selectable range is 000-255 resets. Pad all single and dou-
ble digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-255).
A setting of 255 specifies “retry forever.”
NOTE
0608(CR)
Set RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count

DEFAULT 003 - Three retrys

RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling

This item specifies the method the scanner will use to handle errors detected while
waiting to receive the ACK character from the host. Errors include unrecognized host
commands and communication errors such as parity or framing errors.
• Ignore Errors (recommended setting)
• Assume ACK (risk of lost label data)
• Assume NAK (risk of duplicate label)
To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling:
2. Scan the desired option from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any

Mode bar code.
032300(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling = Ignore Errors
032301(CR)
RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling = Assume ACK
032302(CR)
RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling = Assume NAK

RS-232 Indicate Transmission Failure

This feature enables / disables the ability of the scanner to sound a bad label beep
indication when a transmission failure occurs.

Mode bar code.
032200(CR)
RS-232 Indicate Transmission Failure = Disable
032201(CR)
DEFAULT
RS-232 Indicate Transmission Failure = Enable

Single Cable RS-232 Options

The RS-232 Single Cable interface shares some configuration options with other RS-
232 interfaces. Rather than repeat them in this section as Single Cable options, please
find them referenced as follows:
RS-232 Baud Rate on page 190
RS-232 Number of Data Bits on page 192
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits on page 193
RS-232 Parity on page 194
RS-232 Software Flow Control on page 197
RS-232 Beep After Weigh on page 202
Beep on Not on File on page 203

Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol

This sets the type of interface protocol that will be used in Single Cable RS-232.
Options are:
• Scanner/scale RS-232 protocol
• Scanner only RS-232 protocol
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover

Mode bar code.
047C00(CR)
DEFAULT
Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol = Scanner/
scale RS-232 protocol
047C01(CR)
Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol = Scanner

Only protocol

Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection

Specifies how RTS and CTS are used to control the data flow. RTS is controlled by the
Scanner and can be continuously held high/low, or can be asserted during label
transmission. The scanner looks at CTS, as the configuration values state, to determine when
to send label data.
Choices are:
• Option 0 = RTS is held in low state and CTS is ignored
• Option 1 = RTS is held in high state and CTS is ignored
• Option 2 = Assert RTS and wait for CTS to be asserted
• Option 3 = Assert RTS and ignore CTS
• Option 4 = RTS held low, wait for CTS to be asserted
• Option 5 = RTS held high, wait for CTS to be asserted
2. Scan a bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired option.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that

Mode bar code.
047B00(CR)
Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection = Option 0
047B01(CR)
047B02(CR)
047B03(CR)

Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection (continued)
047B04(CR)
047B05(CR)
DEFAULT

Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use BCC (Block Check Character).

Mode bar code.
047D00(CR)
DEFAULT
Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC = Disable
047D01(CR)
Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC = Enable

Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ACK/NAK.

Mode bar code.
047E00(CR)
DEFAULT
Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK = Disable
047E01(CR)
Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK = Enable

Single Cable RS-232 Use STX

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use STX.

Mode bar code.
047F00(CR)
Single Cable RS-232 Use STX = Disable
047DF01(CR)
DEFAULT
Single Cable RS-232 Use STX = Enable

Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character

This feature selects the STX character.
To specify the STX Character:
2. Scan the bar code, Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the Keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the decimal designation for the desired character. A table containing the
ASCII Character Set and their corresponding decimal values is available in the
inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning
decimal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a
three-digit entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single character value of A, bar codes
containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this
option is any decimal value from 001 to 127.
0479(CR)
Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character

DEFAULT 053 - S

Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ETX.

Mode bar code.
048000(CR)
Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX = Disable
048001(CR)
DEFAULT
Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX = Enable

Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character

Allows selection of the ETX character.
To specify the ETX Character:
2. Scan the bar code, Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner
resent the decimal designation for the desired character. A table containing the
ASCII Character Set and their corresponding decimal values is available in the
inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning
decimal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a
three-digit entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single character value of A, bar codes
containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this
option is any decimal value from 001 to 127.
047A(CR)
Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character

DEFAULT 00D - CR

Single Cable RS-232 Datalogic Extensions

When Datalogic extensions are enabled, scale calibration mode information is
communicated to the host. Contact Customer Support for the format of this
information. Choices for this feature are:
• Standard Protocol
• Support Datalogic Extensions to Protocol

Mode bar code.
050A00(CR)
DEFAULT
Single Cable RS-232 Datalogic Extensions = Standard
Protocol
050A01(CR)
Single Cable RS-232 Datalogic Extensions = Support

Datalogic Extensions to Protocol

Single Cable RS-232 Pacesetter Plus

This option enables the scanner’s ability to send Pacesetter Plus information as
trailers to UPC/EAN bar codes.

Mode bar code.
050800(CR)
DEFAULT
Single Cable RS-232 Pacesetter Plus = Do Not Send
050801(CR)
Single Cable RS-232 Pacesetter Plus = Send

USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Features
USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Intercharacter Delay

Specifies a time delay between characters.
1. Scan the USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Intercharacter Delay bar code.
resent the desired delay. The selectable range for this option is any decimal
value from 00 (no delay) to 99 in 10 ms increments. A table containing the ASCII
Character Set and their corresponding decimal values is available in the inside
back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal
digits for each character. Pad all single digit numbers with leading zero to yield a
two-digit entry (00-99). Thus, to set an intercharacter delay of 70ms, bar codes
containing the digits ‘0’ and ‘7’ must be scanned.

Mode bar code.
0287(CR)
Set USB Keyboard/Keyboard Wedge Intercharacter

Delay
Default setting for this feature is: 01 (10ms)

DEFAULT

Keyboard Wedge No Keyboard Support

Enables the scanner to perform host communications normally performed by an
attached keyboard.

Mode bar code.
028900(CR)
DEFAULT
Keyboard Wedge No Keyboard Support = Disable
028901(CR)
Keyboard Wedge No Keyboard Support = Enable

USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Send Control Characters

This feature specifies how the scanner transmits ASCII control characters to the host.
Affects suffix and prefix characters. When disabled, only ASCII char-
acters between 20H and 127H inclusive (space... delete) plus special
characters 0DH (carriage return), 08H (backspace), 27H (ESC), 09H
(right tab) and 0BH (left tab) are transmitted.
NOTE
Choices are:
Disable — No control characters are sent to the host.
Enable transmission of control characters to host — Control characters are sent to the
host.
Send characters between 00H and 1FH — Send characters between 00H and 1FH
according to special function-key mapping table (This is used to send keys that are
not in normal ASCII set; a unique set is provided for each available scancode set)
2. Scan the bar code for the desired setting below. You’ll need to cover any unused

Mode bar code.
02C500(CR)
DEFAULT
Keyboard Send Control Characters = Disable
02C501(CR)
Keyboard Send Control Characters =

Enable transmission of control characters to host
02C502(CR)
USB Keyboard/Keybd Wedge No Keyboard Support =

Send characters between 00H and 1FH

USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Country Mode

This feature specifies the country/language that will be supported by the keyboard.
030200(CR)
DEFAULT
USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Country Mode =
USA
030201(CR)

Belgium
030202(CR)

Britain
030203(CR)

Denmark
030204(CR)

France
030205(CR)

Germany

USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Country Mode — continued
030206(CR)

Italy
030207(CR)

Norway
030208(CR)

Portugal
030209(CR)

Spain
03020A(CR)

Sweden
03020B(CR)

Switzerland

03020C(CR)

Japanese 106-key
03020D(CR)

Hungary
03020E(CR)

Czech Republic
03020F(CR)

Slovakia
030210(CR)

Romania
030211(CR)

Croatia
030212(CR)

Poland

030213 (CR)

French Canadian
030214 (CR)

Turkish

Keyboard Wedge Quiet Interval

This setting specifies the amount of time to monitor for keyboard activity before
breaking the keyboard connection.
2. Scan the bar code, Keyboard Wedge Quiet Interval. You’ll need to cover any
desired time interval. The selectable range is 001-100, which is the interval in
10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading
zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
0303(CR)
Set Keyboard Wedge Quiet Interval

DEFAULT 00A - 100ms

USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Caps Lock State

This feature specifies the format in which the scanner sends character data.
Selections are:
Caps Lock OFF — Send character data in normal format
Caps Lock ON — Send character data in reverse case
Shift Lock Mode — Send character data in shifted case. This only applies to Wedge G.
For other interfaces, this setting results in a Caps Lock OFF functionality.
Caps Lock Compensation Mode — This only applies to USB Keyboard. For other
interfaces, this setting results in a Caps Lock OFF functionality.
2. Scan the desired selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
030400(CR)
DEFAULT
USB Keyboard and Keyboard Wedge Caps Lock State =
Caps Lock OFF
030401(CR)

Caps Lock ON
030402(CR)

Shift Lock Mode
030403(CR)

Caps Lock Compensation

Chapter 12
Data Editing
Data Editing Overview
These features are not supported by the USB-OEM interface.
CAUTION
When a bar code is scanned, additional information can be sent to the host computer
along with the bar code data. This combination of bar code data and supplementary
user-defined data is called a “message string.” The features in this chapter can be
used to build specific user-defined data into a message string.
There are several types of selectable data characters that can be sent before and after
scanned data. You can specify if they should be sent with all symbologies, or only with
specific symbologies. Figure 53 shows the available elements you can add to a
message string.
Figure 53. Breakdown of a Message String
Label ID Transmission:
Enable this option to transmit
the Label ID you configure for
the scanned symbology.
OR...
Prefix Label ID AIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix
AIM ID: This function is used to identify and display the

common label identifier for its symbology. When enabled,
this ID code will be transmitted before the scanned bar
code data.
00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)
Additional data editing options include the features Case Conversion and Character
Conversion.

Please Keep In Mind...

• Modifying a message string is not a mandatory requirement. Data editing is a
sophisticated feature allowing highly customizable output for advanced users.
Factory default settings for data editing is typically set to NONE.
• A prefix or suffix may be applied (reference the 1D Symbology Programming or
2D Symbology Programming chapter for these settings) across all symbologies
(set via the Global features in this chapter).
• You can add any character from the ASCII Character Set (from 00-7F) on the
inside back cover of this manual as a prefix, suffix or Label ID.
• Enter prefixes and suffixes in the order in which you want them to appear on the
output.
Case Conversion
This option can change the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower case.
2. Scan bar code for the desired option below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar

Mode bar code.
033100(CR)
DEFAULT
Case Conversion = No Case Conversion
033101(CR)
Case Conversion = Upper Case
033102(CR)
Case Conversion = Lower Case

Character Conversion
Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character
pairs represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the
character that will be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to
convert to. If the character to convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done.
For example, if you have the character conversion configuration item set to the
following:
41423132FFFFFFFF
The first pair is 4142 or AB (41 hex is an ASCII capital A, 42 hex is an ASCII capital B) and
the second pair is 3132 or 12 (31 hex is an ASCII 1, 32 is an ASCII 2). The other two pairs
are FFFF and FFFF.
With the label, AG15TA81, it would look as follows after the character conversion:
BG25TB82.
The A characters were converted to the B character and the 1 characters were
converted to the numeral 2 character. Nothing is done with the last two character
pairs, since they are all FF.
To set Character Conversion:
2. Scan the Character Conversion bar code.
3. Determine the desired string. Up to sixteen positions can be determined as in
the above example. Next, turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this
manual and find the equivalent hex digits needed to fulfill the string.
The positions not used must be filled with the character ‘F’.
NOTE
4. Turn to the Keypad in Appendix C and scan the bar codes representing the hex
characters determined in the previous step. When the last character is scanned,
the scanner will sound a triple beep.
Mode bar code.
0332(CR)
Set Character Conversion

DEFAULT FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF (No Character Conversion)

Global Prefix
This feature applies to RS-232 interfaces (Standard, Wincor-Nixdorf, and Single Cable).
It specifies the prefix that is added to beginning of label transmission.
To specify the Global Prefix Character(s):
2. Scan the bar code, Set Global Prefix below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
codes to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
resent the hex designation for the desired character(s). A table containing the
ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside
back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable
range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. Up to 20 hex pairs can be
designated.
To specify “no Global Prefix,” scan 00.
NOTE
4. If designating the full 20 hex pairs, the scanner will automatically exit Program-
ming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. If desig-
nating less than 20 hex pairs, you can end the programming sequence early by
scanning the Terminate Sequence bar code.

Mode bar code.
031D(CR)
Set Global Prefix
00000(CR)
Terminate Sequence

DEFAULT 00 - No Global Prefix

Global Suffix
This feature applies to RS-232 interfaces (Standard, Wincor-Nixdorf, and Single Cable).
It specifies the suffix that is added to end of a label transmission. Three standard
options are available below. Contact your dealer for other alternate settings for this
feature.
• No Global Suffix
• CR — Carriage Return
• CR LF — Carriage Return, Line Feed
To set the Global Suffix:
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below.

Mode bar code.
031E00(CR)
Global Suffix = No Global Suffix
031E0D00(CR)
DEFAULT
Global Suffix = CR
031E0D0A00(CR)
Global Suffix = CR LF

Global AIM ID Enable

This option enables or disables the addition of the AIM ID to all bar code types except
for EAN 128.
To set this option:

Mode bar code.
03A900(CR)
DEFAULT
Global AIM ID = Disable
03A901(CR)
Global AIM ID = Enable

Label ID Control
This feature specifies whether or not Label IDs are transmitted to the host and if so,
whether to attach them as a prefix or suffix.
Choices are:
• Disable
• Enable as a Prefix
• Enable as a Suffix
To select the option for Label ID Control:

Mode bar code.
020500(CR)
Label ID Control = Disable
020501(CR)
DEFAULT
Label ID Control = Enable as a Prefix
020502(CR)
Label ID Control = Enable as a Suffix

Label ID
This feature allows the setting of custom Label ID character(s) for each available
symbology type if other than the default Label ID is desired.
2. Scan the bar code for the desired symbology below. You’ll need to cover any
desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the
range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the Enter/Exit Programming Mode bar code.
1D Symbologies
0024(CR)
Default Label ID for this symbology is:
41 = A
Set UPC-A Label ID
002D(CR)
41 = A
Set UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
002E(CR)
41 = A
Set UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
0025(CR)
45 = E
Set UPC-E Label ID

Label ID — continued
002F(CR)
45 = E
Set UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
0030(CR)
45 = E
Set UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
0027(CR)
46 = F
Set EAN-13 Label ID
0031(CR)
46 = F
Set EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
0032(CR)
46 = F
0026(CR)
4646 = FF
Set EAN-8 Label ID
0033(CR)
4646 = FF

0034(CR)
4646 = FF
0560(CR)
47 = G
Set GTIN Label ID
0561(CR)
4732 = G2
Set GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
0562(CR)
4735 = G5
Set GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
0563(CR)
4738 = G8
Set GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID
04DA(CR)
5234 = R4
Set DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID
0366(CR)
5234 = R4
Set DataBar Omnidirectional Composite Label ID

04DB(CR)
5258 = RX
Set DataBar Expanded Label ID
0367(CR)
5258 = RX
Set DataBar Expanded Composite Label ID
0035(CR)
2A = *
Code 39 Label ID
00F0(CR)
41 = A
Code 32 Label ID
0039(CR)
23 = #
Code 128 Label ID
0419(CR)
50 = P
EAN 128 Label ID

0036(CR)
69 = i
I 2 of 5 Label ID
0037(CR)
25 = %
Codabar Label ID
0038(CR)
26 = &
Code 93 Label ID
00BD(CR)
40 = @
MSI Label ID
049C(CR)
73 = s
Standard 2 of 5 Label ID
046A(CR)
49 = I
ISBN Label ID

2D Symbologies
0105(CR)
446D = Dm
Data Matrix Label ID
05A9(CR)
50 = P
PDF 417 Label ID
0353(CR)
6D50 = mP
Micro PDF 417 Label ID
03DC(CR)
5152 = QR
QR Code Label ID
0429(CR)
2451 = $Q
Micro QR Code Label ID
0435(CR)
417A = Az
Aztec Label ID

Global Mid-Label ID
This feature specifies a global mid-label ID that is added between two bar codes for
transmission.
2. Scan the Set Global Mid-Label ID bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused
bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
desired mid-label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the
range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
bar code.
04C7(CR)
Set Global Mid-Label ID

DEFAULT 00 = No Global Mid-label ID

Chapter 13
1D Symbology Programming
1D Symbologies
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that
interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a program-
ming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configu-
ration items — including symbology programming — to the factory
NOTE default for that interface type.)
The following pages contain configuration information concerning the various bar
code types (symbologies) the scanner supports.

Coupon Control
This feature is used to control the method of processing coupon labels. For the
puposes of this feature, coupon labels are defined as:
1. UPC-A labels that start with a ‘5’
2. GS1 DataBar Expanded labels that start with ‘8110’

The options for this setting are:
• Disable — Coupon Control is turned off.
• Enable UPC-A Coupons — UPC-A coupon labels will decode but GS1 DataBar
Expanded coupon labels will not. GS1 DataBar Expanded labels that are not cou-
pon labels will decode and all UPC-A labels will decode.
• Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded Coupons — GS1 DataBar Expanded coupon labels
will decode but UPC-A coupon labels will not. UPC-A labels that are not coupon
labels will decode and all GS1 DataBar Expanded labels will decode.
2. Scan your choice from the Coupon Control selections below. You’ll need to cover

Mode bar code.
03B900(CR)
Coupon Control = Disable
03B901(CR)
DEFAULT
Coupon Control = Enable UPC-A Coupons
03B902(CR)
Coupon Control = Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded

Coupons

Coupon Label Priority Timer

This feature sets the duration of the UPCA / DataBar coupon label priority timer.

Mode bar code.
037F0A(CR)
Coupon Label Priority Timer = 0.1 Seconds
037F14(CR)
DEFAULT
037F1E(CR)
037F28CR)
037F32(CR)
Coupon Label Priority Timer = 0.5 Second
037F64CR)
Coupon Label Priority Timer = 1 Second

UPC-A Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-A labels.

Mode bar code.
02D000(CR)
UPC-A = Disable
02D001(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC-A = Enable

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A number system character.
This feature MUST be enabled for IBM interfaces for proper function.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is
enabled.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
00D300(CR)
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission =

Disable
00D301(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission =
Enable

UPC-A Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A check character.
enabled.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
00B700(CR)
UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Disable
00B701(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Enable

UPC-A Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive UPC-A decodes before is
accepted as good read.

ming Mode bar code.
006101(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC-A Minimum Read = 1
006102(CR)
006103(CR)
006104(CR)

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13

Enables/disables expansion of UPC-A labels to EAN/JAN-13.

Mode bar code.
004300(CR)
DEFAULT
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 = Disable
004301(CR)
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 = Enable

UPC-E Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-E labels.

Mode bar code.
02D100(CR)
UPC-E = Disable
02D101(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC-E = Enable

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E number system character.
enabled.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
024800(CR)
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission = Dis-

able
024801(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission =
Enable

UPC-E Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E check character.
enabled.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
004000(CR)
UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Disable
004001(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Enable

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A

Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to UPC-A.

Mode bar code.
004100(CR)
DEFAULT
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A = Disable
004101(CR)
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A = Enable

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13

Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to EAN/JAN-13.

Mode bar code.
040200(CR)
DEFAULT
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 = Disable
040201(CR)
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 = Enable

UPC-E Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive UPC-E decodes before is

ming Mode bar code.
006201(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC-E Minimum Read = 1
006202(CR)
006203(CR)
006204(CR)

EAN-13 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-13 labels.

Mode bar code.
02D300(CR)
EAN-13 = Disable
02D301(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-13 = Enable

EAN-13 First Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of EAN/JAN-13 first character.
enabled.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
024400(CR)
EAN-13 First Character Transmission = Disable
024401(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-13 First Character Transmission = Enable

EAN-13 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-13 check character.
enabled.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
00B900(CR)
EAN-13 Check Character Transmission = Disable
00B901(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-13 Check Character Transmission = Enable

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable

Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN-13 labels starting with 978 to Bookland
ISBN labels.

Mode bar code.
02AA00(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Disable
02AA01(CR)
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Enable

EAN-13 Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive EAN-13 decodes before is

ming Mode bar code.
006401(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-13 Minimum Read = 1
006402(CR)
006403(CR)
006404(CR)

EAN-8 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-8 labels.

Mode bar code.
02D200(CR)
EAN-8 = Disable
02D201(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-8 = Enable

EAN-8 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-8 check character.
enabled.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
00B800(CR)
EAN-8 Check Character Transmission = Disable
00B801(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-8 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13

Enables/disables expansion of EAN/JAN-8 labels to EAN/JAN-13.

Mode bar code.
021B00(CR)
DEFAULT
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 = Disable
021B01(CR)
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 = Enable

EAN-8 Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive EAN-8 decodes before is

ming Mode bar code.
006501(CR)
DEFAULT
006502(CR)
006503(CR)
006504(CR)

EAN-8 Guard Insertion

This setting enables the insertion of either a missing leading or trailing guard to a
scanned bar code.

Mode bar code.
054300(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-8 Guard Insertion = Disable
054301(CR)
EAN-8 Guard Insertion = Enable

EAN-8 Guard Substitution

This setting enables the scanner to substitute a guard pattern for even-parity 6 for
EAN8/JAN8 labels.

Mode bar code.
02FB00(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-8 Guard Insertion = Disable
02FB01(CR)
EAN-8 Guard Insertion = Enable

EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves

This setting enables the stitching of exact EAN-8 label halves with no overlapping
characters.

Mode bar code.
054400(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves = Disable
054401(CR)
EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves = Enable

EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves

This setting enables the stitching of two EAN-8 label halves together that may have
different characters.

Mode bar code.
054500(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves = Disable
054501(CR)
EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves = Enable

Other UPC/EAN Options

The following pages contain other selectable features for UPC/EAN symbologies:
• In-Store Printed Label Minimum Read
• UPC/EAN Correlation
• UPC/EAN Guard Insertion
• UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves
• UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves
• UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length
• Price Weight Check
• Enable EAN Two Label
• Addons

In-Store Printed Label Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive In-Store Printed Label
decodes before is accepted as good read.

ming Mode bar code.
008501(CR)
DEFAULT
In-Store Printed Label Minimum Read = 1
008502(CR)
008503(CR)
008504(CR)

UPC/EAN Correlation
Enables/disables character correlation for UPC/EAN.

ming Mode bar code.
050700(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC/EAN Correlation = Disable
050701(CR)
UPC/EAN Correlation = Enable

UPC/EAN Guard Insertion

This setting enables the insertion of either a missing leading or trailing guard to a
scanned bar code.

Mode bar code.
054000(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC/EAN Guard Insertion = Disable
054001(CR)
UPC/EAN Guard Insertion = Enable

UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves

This setting enables the stitching of exact UPC-A/EAN-13 label halves with no
overlapping characters.

Mode bar code.
054100(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves = Disable
054101(CR)
UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves = Enable

UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves

This setting enables the stitching of two UPC-A/EAN-13 label halves together that
may have different characters.

Mode bar code.
054200(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves = Disable
054201(CR)
UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves = Enable

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length

This feature specifies the minimum number of characters needed in a UPC/EAN
segment in order to be accepted for decoding.
2. Scan the bar code for the desired setting below. You’ll need to cover any unused

Mode bar code.
048F05(CR)
DEFAULT
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length = 5 Characters
048F06(CR)
048F07(CR)
048F08(CR)
048F09(CR)

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued
048F0A(CR)
048F0B(CR)
048F0C(CR)
048F0D(CR)
048F0E(CR)
048F0F(CR)
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length =15 Characters

Price Weight Check

Enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits. Applies to
all UPC-A and EAN/JAN-13 labels with eligible1 Number System/First Character
digits.
Options are:
• Disable
• 4-digit price/weight
• 5-digit price/weight
• 4-digit European price/weight
• 5-digit European price/weight
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following
pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that

Mode bar code.
005C00(CR)
DEFAULT
Price Weight Check = Disable
005C01(CR)
Price Weight Check = 4-digit price/weight
005C02(CR)
Price Weight Check = 5-digit price/weight
1. Price Weight Check generally applies to UPC-A labels with a Number System Digit of 2 and EAN/JAN-13 labels with a First
Character of 2. There are a total of six flag digits corresponding to the six types. Checking applies depending upon which type
is enabled.

Price Weight Check (continued)
005C03(CR)
Price Weight Check = 4-digit European price/weight
005C04(CR)
Price Weight Check = 5-digit European price/weight

Enable EAN Two Label

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN two-label pairs.

Mode bar code.
Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for

this feature.
NOTE
004400(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN Two Label = Disable
004401(CR)
EAN Two Label = Enable

EAN Two Label Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive EAN Two Label decodes
before is accepted as good read.

ming Mode bar code.
008601(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN Two Label Minimum Read = 1
008602(CR)
008603(CR)
008604(CR)

EAN Two Label Combined Transmission

Enables/disables the transmitting of an EAN two label pair as one label.

Mode bar code.
02E200(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN Two Label Combined Transmission = Disable
02E201(CR)
EAN Two Label Combined Transmission = Enable

Addons
The scanner is capable of processing different types of addon codes, including:
• 2-Digit Supplemental
• 5-Digit Supplemental
Options are provided on the following pages for your convenience:
• Disable all addons — The scanner will not look for or read addons.
• Optional 2-Digit and 5-Digit Supplemental — Bar Codes can be read which
include 2-Digit or 5-Digit Supplementals, however, it is not required that addons
be included in bar codes.
Contact customer support for advanced programming of optional and

conditional addons.
NOTE
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on this and the following
page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that

Mode bar code.
051000(CR)051100(CR)
DEFAULT
Addons = Disable All Addons
051001(CR)051101(CR)
Addons = Optional 2-Digit and 5-Digit Supplemental

P2 Addon Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of times a P2 addon must decode before
it is marked valid.

Mode bar code.
005F02(CR)
DEFAULT
P2 Addon Minimum Read = 2
005F03(CR)
005F04(CR)
005F05(CR)
005F06(CR)

P2 Addon Minimum Read — continued
005F07(CR)
005F08(CR)
005F09(CR)
005F0A(CR)
005F0B(CR)
005F0C(CR)
005F0D(CR)

005F0E(CR)
005F0F(CR)

P5 Addon Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of times a P5 addon must decode before
it is marked valid.

Mode bar code.
007D01(CR)
DEFAULT
007D02(CR)
007D03(CR)
007D04(CR)
007D05(CR)
007D06(CR)

007D07(CR)
007D08(CR)
007D09(CR)
007D0A(CR)
007D0B(CR)
007D0C(CR)
007D0D(CR)

007D0E(CR)
007D0F(CR)

GTIN Enable
Enables/Disables the ability to convert UPCE, UPCA, EAN8, and EAN13 labels into the
GTIN 14-character format.
If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion

taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted
GTIN bar code.
NOTE

Mode bar code.
051500(CR)
DEFAULT
GTIN = Disable
051501(CR)
GTIN = Enable

GS1 DataBar
The symbology family, GS1 DataBarTM, was formerly known as Reduced Space
Symbology (RSS). For the purpose of simplicity, GS1 DataBar variants are listed in this
manual as “DataBar.”
DataBar Omnidirectional Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode DataBar Omnidirectional labels.
This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your

dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this
advanced capability.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
04D000(CR)
DEFAULT
DataBar Omnidirectional = Disable
04D001(CR)
DataBar Omnidirectional = Enable

DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 Emulation

Enables/disables the ability of DataBar Omnidirectional to be transmitted as EAN-
128.
1. To set this feature:

ming Mode bar code.
04D400(CR)
DEFAULT
DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 Emulation =
Disable
04D401(CR)
DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 Emulation = Enable

DataBar Omnidirectional 2D Component Enable

When this feature is enabled, the software will not decode an DataBar
Omnidirectional bar code with a 2D component associated with it, and the 2D
component will be discarded.

ming Mode bar code.
04D600(CR)
DEFAULT
DataBar Omnidirectional 2D Component = Disable
04D601(CR)
DataBar Omnidirectional 2D Component = Enable

DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive DataBar Omnidirectional

ming Mode bar code.
04D201(CR)
DEFAULT
DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Read = 1
04D202(CR)
04D203(CR)
04D204(CR)

DataBar Omnidirectional Double Read Timeout

Specifies the minimum allowable time which must pass before reading the same DataBar
Omnidirectional label again (e.g. two identical items in succession).
bar code.
00510A(CR)
DataBar Omnidirectional Double Read

Timeout = 0.5 Seconds
005114(CR)

Timeout = 1 Second
005132(CR)
DEFAULT
00513C(CR)

Timeout = 3 Seconds
005146(CR)


DataBar Expanded Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode DataBar Expanded labels.
This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your

dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this
advanced capability.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
04D100(CR)
DEFAULT
DataBar Expanded = Disable
04D101(CR)
DataBar Expanded = Enable

DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emulation

Enables/disables EAN 128 emulation for DataBar Expanded.

ming Mode bar code.
04D500(CR)
DEFAULT
DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emulation = Disable
04D501(CR)
DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emulation = Enable

DataBar Expanded 2D Component Enable

When this feature is enabled, the software will not decode an DataBar Expanded bar
code with a 2D component associated with it, and the 2D component will be
discarded.

ming Mode bar code.
04D700(CR)
DEFAULT
DataBar Expanded 2D Component = Disable
04D701(CR)
DataBar Expanded 2D Component = Enable

DataBar Expanded Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive DataBar Expanded

ming Mode bar code.
04D301(CR)
DEFAULT
DataBar Expanded Minimum Read = 1
04D302(CR)
04D303(CR)
04D304(CR)

DataBar Expanded Length Control

This feature specifies either variable-length or fixed-length decoding for DataBar
Expanded.

ming Mode bar code.
04BD00(CR)
DEFAULT
DataBar Expanded Length Control = Variable Length
04BD01(CR)
DataBar Expanded Length Control = Fixed Length

DataBar Expanded Length 1

Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed
length if in fixed length mode. Length includes the bar code's data characters only.
2. Scan the bar code, Set DataBar Expanded Length 1 below. You’ll need to cover
desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 00 to 74. Pad all sin-
gle digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74).

ming Mode bar code.
04BE(CR)
Set DataBar Expanded Length 1
Default setting for this feature = 01

DEFAULT

DataBar Expanded Length 2

Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed
length if in fixed length mode. Length includes the bar code's data characters only.
When in Fixed Length mode, if Length 2 is set to the value of 00 (zero),

then only Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
2. Scan the bar code, Set DataBar Expanded Length 2 below. You’ll need to cover

ming Mode bar code.
04BF(CR)
Set DataBar Expanded Length 2
Default setting for this feature = 4A (length = 74)

DEFAULT

DataBar Expanded Reverse Retry

Enables/disables the reading of out of specification labels where the last row has
been printed in reverse.
• When enabled, DataBar Expanded Stacked labels that have the last row incor-
rectly printed in reverse will be re-decoded.
• When disabled, DataBar Expanded Stacked labels that have the last row incor-
rectly printed in reverse will not be read.

ming Mode bar code.
04D800(CR)
DEFAULT
DataBar Expanded Reverse Retry = Disable
04D801(CR)
DataBar Expanded Reverse Retry = Enable

Code 39 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 39 labels.

ming Mode bar code.
008E00(CR)
Code 39 = Disable
008E01(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 39 = Enable

Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.
enabled
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
022400(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission = Disable
022401(CR)
Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission = Enable

Code 39 Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check character.
When disabled, any check character in label is treated as a data character.
If check calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can

occur.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
005500(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Disable
005501(CR)
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable

Code 39 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of optional Code 39 check character.
enabled.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
008A00(CR)
Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Disable
008A01(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Code 39 Full ASCII

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to translate to Code 39 full ASCII labels.

ming Mode bar code.
022F00(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 39 Full ASCII = Disable
022F01(CR)
Code 39 Full ASCII = Enable

Code 39 Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive Code 39 decodes before is

ming Mode bar code.
006B01(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 39 Minimum Read = 1
006B02(CR)
006B03(CR)
006B04(CR)

Code 39 Correlation
Enables/disables character correlation for Code 39.

ming Mode bar code.
050200(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 39 Correlation = Disable
050201(CR)
Code 39 Correlation = Enable

Code 39 Length Control

This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for
Code 39.

ming Mode bar code.
04B100(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 39 Length Control = Variable Length
04B101(CR)
Code 39 Length Control = Fixed Length

Code 39 Length 1
If Code 39 Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies Code
39 first fixed length. If Code 39 Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding, this
feature specifies the minimum label length.
2. Scan the bar code, Set Code 39 Length 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused

ming Mode bar code.
04B2(CR)
Set Code 39 Length 1

DEFAULT

Code 39 Length 2
39 second fixed length. If Code 39 Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding,
this feature specifies the maximum label length.
When in Fixed Length mode, if Length 2 is set to the value of 00, then
only Length 1 will apply
NOTE
desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 00, no second fixed
length, or 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a
two-digit entry (00-50).

ming Mode bar code.
04B3(CR)
Default setting for this feature = 32 (length = 50)

DEFAULT

Code 39 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Code 39 labels. When parts of a Code 39 bar code are
presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be
assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code
proofing requirements are met.

ming Mode bar code.
00D100(CR)
Code 39 Stitching = Disable
00D101(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 39 Stitching = Enable

Code 39 Require Margins

Enables/disables the requirement that quiet zones be present in a Code 39 bar code.

ming Mode bar code.
04BA00(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 39 Require Margins = Quiet Zones Not Required
04BA01(CR)
Code 39 Require Margins = Quiet Zones Required

Code 32 Italian Pharmacode Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Italian Pharmaceutical Code 39
labels.

ming Mode bar code.
00EE00(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 32 Italian Pharmacode Enable = Disable
00EE01(CR)
Code 32 Italian Pharmacode Enable = Enable

Code 32 Start Stop Character Transmission

Enables/ disables transmission of start and stop characters for Code 32.
enabled.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
00F600(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 32 Start Stop Character Transmission = Disable
00F601(CR)
Code 32 Start Stop Character Transmission = Enable

Code 32 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of Code 32 check character.
enabled.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
00EF00(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Disable
00EF01(CR)
Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Code 128 Enable


ming Mode bar code.
009200(CR)
Code 128 = Disable
009201(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 128 = Enable

Code 128 Transmit Function Characters

Enables/disables transmission of Code 128 function characters 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Disabled is the recommended setting for all interfaces.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
02C700(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 128 Transmit Function Characters = Disable
02C701(CR)
Code 128 Transmit Function Characters = Enable

Expand Code128 to Code 39

Enables/disables expansion of Code 128 labels to Code 39.

ming Mode bar code.
069600(CR)
DEFAULT
Expand Code128 to Code 39 = Disable
069601(CR)
Expand Code128 to Code 39 = Enable


This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive Code 128 decodes before
is accepted as good read.

ming Mode bar code.
006F01(CR)
DEFAULT
006F02(CR)
006F03(CR)
006F04(CR)

Code 128 Correlation


ming Mode bar code.
050100(CR)
DEFAULT
050101(CR)


Code 128.

ming Mode bar code.
04B700(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 128 Length Control = Variable Length
04B701(CR)
Code 128 Length Control = Fixed Length

Code 128 Length 1

128 first fixed length. If Code 128 Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding,
this feature specifies the minmum label length.

ming Mode bar code.
04B8(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 128 Length 2

128 second fixed length. If Code 128 Length Control is set to Variable-Length
decoding, this feature specifies the maximum label length.

NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
04B9(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 128 Stitching


ming Mode bar code.
06A800(CR)
06A801(CR)
DEFAULT

EAN-128 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to translate EAN128 labels to the EAN128
data format.

ming Mode bar code.
02D800(CR)
DEFAULT
EAN-128 = Transmit EAN128 labels in Code128 data
format
02D801(CR)
EAN-128 = Transmit EAN128 labels in EAN128 data for-

mat

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 OF 5) Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 labels.

ming Mode bar code.
009000(CR)
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 = Disable
009001(CR)
I 2 of 5 = Enable

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check
character.
If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a

misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code
are treated as data characters.
NOTE
1. To set this feature:

ming Mode bar code.
007000(CR)
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable
007001(CR)
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check character.
This feature applies only when I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation is

enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit,
is enabled.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
008B00(CR)
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Disable
008B01(CR)
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Enable

I 2 of 5 Minimum Read
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive I 2 of 5 decodes before is

ming Mode bar code.
006D01(CR)
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Minimum Read = 1
006D02(CR)
006D03(CR)
006D04(CR)

I 2 of 5 Correlation
Enables/disables character correlation for I 2 of 5.

ming Mode bar code.
050500(CR)
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Correlation = Disable
050501(CR)
I 2 of 5 Correlation = Enable

I 2 of 5 Length Control
I 2 of 5.

ming Mode bar code.
022B00(CR)
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
022B01(CR)
I 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

I 2 of 5 Length 1
If I 2 of 5 Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies I 2 of 5
first fixed length. If I 2 of 5 Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding, this
2. Scan the bar code, Set I 2 of 5 Length 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused
desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 02 to 50, even num-
bers only. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit
entry (02-50).

ming Mode bar code.
0056(CR)
Set I 2 of 5 Length 1

DEFAULT

I 2 of 5 Length 2
If I 2 of 5 Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies I 2 of 5
second fixed length. If I 2 of 5 Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding, this
feature specifies the maximum label length.

NOTE
2. Scan the bar code, Set I 2 of 5 Length 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused
desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 00, or 02 to 50; even
numbers only. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-
digit entry (02-50).

ming Mode bar code.
0057(CR)
Set I 2 of 5 Length 2

DEFAULT

I 2 of 5 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for I 2 of 5 labels. When parts of an I 2 of 5 bar code are

ming Mode bar code.
06AF00(CR)
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Stitching = Disable
06AF01(CR)
I 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable

Codabar Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Codabar labels.

ming Mode bar code.
008F00(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar = Disable
008F01(CR)
Codabar = Enable

Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.
enabled.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
009300(CR)
Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission = Disable
009301(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission = Enable

Codabar Start Stop Character Set

This feature specifies the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop characters.
Options are:
• ABCD/TN* E
• ABCD/ABCD
• abcd/tn* e
• abcd/abcd
2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page representing the desired
option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes and facing pages to ensure

ming Mode bar code.
022E00(CR)
Codabar Start Stop Character Set = ABCD/TN* E
022E01(CR)
Codabar Start Stop Character Set = ABCD/ABCD
022E02(CR)
Codabar Start Stop Character Set = abcd/tn* e
022E03(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Start Stop Character Set = abcd/abcd

Codabar Start Stop Character Match

Enables/disables the requirement that start and stop characters match.

ming Mode bar code.
023200(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Start Stop Character Match = Disable
023201(CR)
Codabar Start Stop Character Match = Enable

Codabar Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check character.

NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
007100(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Check Character Calculation = Disable
007101(CR)
Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable

Codabar Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an optional Codabar check character.
Applies only when Codabar Check Character Calculation is enabled. This

item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
008C00(CR)
Codabar Check Character Transmission = Disable
008C01(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Check Character Transmission = Enable

Codabar Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive Codabar decodes before is

ming Mode bar code.
006C01(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Minimum Read = 1
006C02(CR)
006C03(CR)
006C04(CR)

Codabar Correlation
Enables/disables character correlation for Codabar.

ming Mode bar code.
050400(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Correlation = Disable
050401(CR)
Codabar Correlation = Enable

Codabar Length Control

Codabar.

ming Mode bar code.
023300(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Length Control = Variable Length
023301(CR)
Codabar Length Control = Fixed Length

Codabar Length 1
If Codabar Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies
Codabar first fixed length. If Codabar Length Control is set to Variable-Length
decoding, this feature specifies the minimum label length.
2. Scan the bar code, Set Codabar Length 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused

ming Mode bar code.
0238(CR)
Set Codabar Length 1

DEFAULT

Codabar Length 2
If Codabar Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies
Codabar second fixed length. If Codabar Length Control is set to Variable-Length
decoding, this feature specifies the maximum label length.

NOTE
2. Scan the bar code, Set Codabar Length 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused
desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 00 (meaning ignore
this length), or 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a

ming Mode bar code.
0239(CR)
Set Codabar Length 2

DEFAULT

Codabar Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Codabar labels. When parts of a Codabar bar code are

ming Mode bar code.
06AD00(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Stitching = Disable
06AD01(CR)
Codabar Stitching = Enable

Codabar Require Margins

Enables/disables the requirement that quiet zones be present in a Codabar bar code.

ming Mode bar code.
068D00(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Require Margins = Quiet Zones Not Required
068D01(CR)
Codabar Require Margins = Quiet Zones Required

Code 93 Enable

ming Mode bar code.
009100(CR)
DEFAULT
Code 93 = Disable
009101(CR)
Code 93 = Enable


This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive Code 93 decodes before is

ming Mode bar code.
006E01(CR)
DEFAULT
006E02(CR)
006E03(CR)
006E04(CR)

Code 93 Correlation

ming Mode bar code.
050300(CR)
DEFAULT
050301(CR)


Code 93.

ming Mode bar code.
068700(CR)
DEFAULT
Codabar Length Control = Variable Length
068701(CR)
Codabar Length Control = Fixed Length

Code 93 Length 1
93 first fixed length. If Code 93 Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding, this

ming Mode bar code.
0685(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 93 Length 2
93 second fixed length. If Code 93 Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding,
this feature specifies the maximum label length.
When in Fixed Length mode, if Fixed Length 2 is set to the value of 00

(zero), then only Length 1 will apply.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
0686(CR)

DEFAULT

Code 93 Stitching

ming Mode bar code.
06AE00(CR)
06AE01(CR)
DEFAULT

MSI Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode MSI labels.

ming Mode bar code.
00C100(CR)
DEFAULT
MSI = Disable
00C101(CR)
MSI = Enable

MSI Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of optional MSI check characters.

NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
021600(CR)
MSI Check Character Calculation = Disable
021601(CR)
DEFAULT
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable

MSI Number of Check Characters

Specifies number of MSI check characters to be calculated and verified.
Check characters are always modulus 10.
NOTE
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired number of MSI check charac-
ters to be calculated and verified. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.

ming Mode bar code.
021700(CR)
DEFAULT
MSI Number of Check Characters = 1
021701(CR)
MSI Number of Check Characters = 2

MSI Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of optional MSI check characters.
This feature applies only when MSI Check Character Calculation is

enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit,
is enabled.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
00BE00(CR)
MSI Check Character Transmission = Disable
00BE01(CR)
DEFAULT
MSI Check Character Transmission = Enable

MSI Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive MSI decodes before is

ming Mode bar code.
00BF01(CR)
DEFAULT
MSI Minimum Read = 1
00BF02(CR)
00BF03(CR)
00BF04(CR)

MSI Correlation
Enables/disables character correlation for MSI.

ming Mode bar code.
050600(CR)
DEFAULT
MSI Correlation = Disable
050601(CR)
MSI Correlation = Enable

MSI Length Control

MSI.

ming Mode bar code.
020000(CR)
DEFAULT
MSI Length Control = Variable Length
020001(CR)
MSI Length Control = Fixed Length

MSI Length 1
If MSI Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies MSI first
fixed length. If MSI Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding, this feature
specifies the minimum label length.
2. Scan the bar code, Set MSI Length 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 4 to 16. Pad all single
digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (04-16).

ming Mode bar code.
00CB(CR)
Set MSI Length 1

DEFAULT

MSI Length 2
If MSI Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies MSI
second fixed length. If MSI Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding, this
feature specifies the maximum label length.
When in Fixed Length mode, if Length 2 is set to the value 00 (zero), then
only Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
2. Scan the bar code, Set MSI Length 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
two-digit entry (00, 04-16).

ming Mode bar code.
00CC(CR)
Set MSI Length 2

DEFAULT

MSI Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for MSI labels. When parts of an MSI bar code are

ming Mode bar code.
050000(CR)
DEFAULT
MSI Stitching = Disable
050001(CR)
MSI Stitching = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Standard 2 of 5 labels.

ming Mode bar code.
049400(CR)
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 = Disable
049401(CR)
Standard 2 of 5 = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check
character.

misread can occur. When disabled, any check character in a bar code is
treated as data character.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
049600(CR)
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable
049601(CR)
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.
This feature applies only when Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calcula-

tion is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full
Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
049B00(CR)
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Dis-

able
049B01(CR)
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Read

This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive Standard 2 of 5 decodes
before is accepted as good read.

ming Mode bar code.
049501(CR)
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Read = 1
049502(CR)
049503(CR)
049504(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 Correlation
Enables/disables character correlation for Standard 2 of 5.

ming Mode bar code.
059300(CR)
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Correlation = Disable
059301(CR)
Standard 2 of 5 Correlation = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control

Standard 2 of 5.

ming Mode bar code.
049700(CR)
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
049701(CR)
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

Standard 2 of 5 Length 1
If Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature
specifies Standard 2 of 5 first fixed length. If Standard 2of 5 Length Control is set to
Variable-Length decoding, this feature specifies the minimum label length.
2. Scan the bar code, Set Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 below. You’ll need to cover any

ming Mode bar code.
0498(CR)
Set Standard 2 of 5 Length 1

DEFAULT

Standard 2 of 5 Length 2
If Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature
specifies Standard 2 of 5 second fixed length. If Standard 2of 5 Length Control is set to
Variable-Length decoding, this feature specifies the maximum label length.

NOTE
2. Scan the bar code, Set Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 below. You’ll need to cover any

ming Mode bar code.
0499(CR)
Set Standard 2 of 5 Length 2

DEFAULT

Standard 2 of 5 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Standard 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Standard 2 of 5
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts
will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar
code proofing requirements are met.
This applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-length

decoding.
NOTE

ming Mode bar code.
059200(CR)
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching = Disable
059201(CR)
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable

Chapter 14
2D Symbologies
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that
interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a program-
ming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configu-
ration items — including symbology programming — to the factory
NOTE default for that interface type.)
The following pages contain configuration information concerning the various 2D bar
code types (symbologies) the scanner supports.

Data Matrix Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Data Matrix labels.

Mode bar code.
010000(CR)
DEFAULT
Data Matrix = Disable
010001(CR)
Data Matrix = Enable

Data Matrix Length Control

Fixed Length Decoding — When fixed length decoding is enabled, the scanner will
decode a bar code if the label length matches one of the configurable fixed lengths.
Variable Length Decoding — When variable length decoding is enabled, the scanner will
decode a ar code if the label length falls in the range of the configurable minimum and
maximum length.
Configuring Fixed Length Decoding:
2. Scan the Fixed Length Decoding bar code.
4. Set Length 1 to the first fixed length using the Data Matrix Length 1, Length 2
Programming Instructions that follow this page.
5. Set Length 2 to the second fixed length (or to ‘0000’ if there is only one fixed
length) using the Data Matrix Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions.
Configuring Variable Length Decoding:
2. Scan the Variable Length Decoding bar code.
4. Set Length 1 to the minimum length using the Data Matrix Length 1, Length 2
5. Set Length 2 to the maximum length using the Data Matrix Length 1, Length 2
Programming Instructions.
010200(CR)
DEFAULT
Data Matrix Length Control = Variable Length
010201(CR)
Data Matrix Length Control = Fixed Length

Data Matrix Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions

If Data Matrix Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies
Data Matrix first fixed length. If Data Matrix Length Control is set to Variable-Length
For Data Matrix bar codes, only the data characters are included in
the length calculations.
NOTE
2. Scan the bar code, Set Data Matrix Length 1or Set Data Matrix Length 2 below.
desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 0001 to 3116. Pad all
numbers with leading zeros to yield a four-digit entry (0001-3116).

ming Mode bar code.
0103(CR)
Set Data Matrix Length 1
0104(CR)
Set Data Matrix Length 2

PDF 417 Enable

Enablesthe processing of PDF417 labels read by a handheld scanner attached to the
auxiliary port.

Mode bar code.
05A100(CR)
PDF 417 = Disable
05A101(CR)
DEFAULT
PDF 417 = Enable

PDF 417 Length Control

maximum length.
4. Set Length 1 to the first fixed length using the PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2 Pro-
gramming Instructions that follow this page.
length) using the PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions.
4. Set Length 1 to the minimum length using the PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2 Pro-
5. Set Length 2 to the maximum length using the PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2 Pro-
gramming Instructions.
05A300(CR)
DEFAULT
PDF 417 Length Control = Variable Length
05A301(CR)
PDF 417 Length Control = Fixed Length

PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions

If PDF417 Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies
PDF417 first fixed length. If PDF417 Length Control is set to Variable-Length
This tag is only valid for units with a model id that supports PDF.
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or

the first fixed length if in fixed length mode. Length 2 is the maxi-
NOTE mum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed
length if in fixed length mode. Length includes the bar code's data
characters only. Any value > 2710 will be considered to be 2710.
2. Scan the bar code, Set PDF 417 Length 1 or Set PDF 417 Length 2 below. You’ll

ming Mode bar code.
05A6(CR)
Set PDF 417 Length 1
05A7(CR)
Default setting for this feature = 0A96
Set PDF 417 Length 2

PDF 417 Read Option

This feature specifies an additional read control option for PDF 417 bar codes.

Mode bar code.
05A400(CR)
DEFAULT
PDF 417 Read Option = None
05A401(CR)
PDF 417 Read Option = Turn Off Codeword

Length Checking

Micro PDF 417 Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Micro PDF 417 labels.

Mode bar code.
034E00(CR)
DEFAULT
Micro PDF 417 = Disable
034E01(CR)
Micro PDF 417 = Enable

Micro PDF 417 Length Control

maximum length.
4. Set Length 1 to the first fixed length using the Micro PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2
length) using the Micro PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions.
4. Set Length 1 to the minimum length using the Micro PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2
5. Set Length 2 to the maximum length using the Micro PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2
035B00(CR)
DEFAULT
Micro PDF 417 Length Control = Variable Length
035B01(CR)
Micro PDF 417 Length Control = Fixed Length

Micro PDF 417 Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions

If Micro PDF 417 Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies
Micro PDF 417 first fixed length. If Micro PDF 417 Length Control is set to Variable-
Length decoding, this feature specifies the minimum label length.
This tag is only valid for units with a model ID that supports PDF.

NOTE mum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed
characters only. Any value > 0366 will be considered to be 0366.
2. Scan the bar code, Set Micro PDF 417 Length 1 or Set Micro PDF 417 Length 2
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

ming Mode bar code.
0350(CR)
Set Micro PDF 417 Length 1
0351(CR)
Default setting for this feature = 016E
Set Micro PDF 417 Length 2

Micro PDF 417 128 Emulation

This feature specifies which AIM ID to use for Micro PDF 417 labels when performing
Code 128 or EAN 128 emulation.
2. Scan the bar code below for the desired setting. You’ll need to cover any unused

Mode bar code.
032700(CR)
DEFAULT
Micro PDF 417 128 Emulation = Micro PDF AIM ID and
label type when emulating EAN128 or Code 128
032701(CR)
Micro PDF 417 128 Emulation = Code 128 / EAN128 AIM

ID and label type when emulating EAN128 or Code 128

QR Code Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode QR Code labels.

Mode bar code.
03D700(CR)
DEFAULT
QR Code = Disable
03D701(CR)
QR Code = Enable

QR Code Length Control

maximum length.
4. Set Length 1 to the first fixed length using the QR Code Length 1, Length 2 Pro-
length) using the QR Code Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions.
4. Set Length 1 to the minimum length using the QR Code Length 1, Length 2 Pro-
5. Set Length 2 to the maximum length using the QR Code Length 1, Length 2 Pro-
03D900(CR)
DEFAULT
QR Code Length Control = Variable Length
03D901(CR)
QR Code Length Control = Fixed Length

QR Code Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions

If QR Code Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies QR
Code first fixed length. If QR Code Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding,
this feature specifies the minimum label length.
mum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed
NOTE characters only. Any value > 2710 will be considered to be 2710.
2. Scan the bar code, Set QR Code Length 1 or Set QR Code Length 2 below. You’ll

ming Mode bar code.
03DA(CR)
Set QR Code Length 1
03DB(CR)
Default setting for this feature = 0A96
Set QR Code Length 2

QR Code URL Link Enable

Enables/Disables the decoding of QR codes with a URL link on imagers other than the
optional Customer Service Scanner (CSS).

Mode bar code.
03A100(CR)
DEFAULT
QR Code URL Link = Disable
03A101(CR)
QR Code URL Link = Enable

Micro QR Code Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Micro QRCode labels.

Mode bar code.
042800(CR)
DEFAULT
Micro QR Code = Disable
042801(CR)
Micro QR Code = Enable

Micro QR Code Length Control

maximum length.
4. Set Length 1 to the first fixed length using the Micro QR Code Length 1, Length 2
length) using the Micro QR Code Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions.
4. Set Length 1 to the minimum length using the Micro QR Code Length 1, Length 2
5. Set Length 2 to the maximum length using the Micro QR Code Length 1, Length 2
042A00(CR)
DEFAULT
Micro QR Code Length Control = Variable Length
042A01(CR)
Micro QR Code Length Control = Fixed Length

Micro QR Code Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions

If Micro QR Code Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies
Micro QR Code first fixed length. If Micro QR Code Length Control is set to Variable-
Length decoding, this feature specifies the minimum label length.
2. Scan the bar code, Set Aztec Length 1 or Set Micro QR Code Length 2 below.

ming Mode bar code.
042B(CR)
Set Micro QR Code Length 1
042C(CR)
Default setting for this feature = 0E74
Set Micro QR Code Length 2

Aztec Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Aztec labels.

Mode bar code.
043000(CR)
DEFAULT
Aztec = Disable
043001(CR)
Aztec = Enable

Aztec Length Control

maximum length.
4. Set Length 1 to the first fixed length using the Aztec Length 1, Length 2 Pro-
length) using the Aztec Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions.
4. Set Length 1 to the minimum length using the Aztec Length 1, Length 2 Pro-
5. Set Length 2 to the maximum length using the Aztec Length 1, Length 2 Pro-
043200(CR)
DEFAULT
Aztec Length Control = Variable Length
043201(CR)
Aztec Length Control = Fixed Length

Aztec Length 1, Length 2 Programming Instructions

If Aztec Length Control is set to Fixed-Length decoding, this feature specifies Aztec
first fixed length. If Aztec Length Control is set to Variable-Length decoding, this
2. Scan the bar code, Set Aztec Length 1 or Set Aztec Length 2 below. You’ll need to

ming Mode bar code.
0433(CR)
Set Aztec Length 1
0434(CR)
Default setting for this feature = 0E74
Set Aztec Length 2

Appendix A
LED/Audio Indications & Controls
Good Read Indicator
The scanner features a prominent LED indicator bar on top of its vertical “bonnet” (see
Figure 54).
Figure 54. Scanner and Scale Controls

Controls and Indicators
As Figure 55 illustrates, two panels on either side of the vertical scan windows contain
control buttons and more LED indicators. Additionally, a configurable speaker is used
to sound scanning, weighing and EAS deactivation indications.
Reference Table 15 for descriptions of these controls and indicators.
Figure 55. Control Buttons and Indicator LEDs
2
6
3

Table 15. Control and Indicator Descriptions
1 Scanner Control Button 4 EAS/CSS Button

This button can be programmed to perform multi-
ple functions. The button can be configured to...
...turn an optional Customer Service Scanner (CSS)
ON or OFF upon a pressing the button momentar-
ily. See CSS Button Option on page 112.
...manually deactivate an item with a momentary
See the topic Scanner Control Button, button press when configured to be in EAS Manual
in this section for more information. Deactivation Mode. EAS Mode on page 158.
...If both of the above two options are enabled, a
momentary button push will activate the CSS,
while a one-second button push is required to
The LED indicator associated with this button indi-
cates EAS functions.
2 Scale Zero Button 5 ScaleSentry / Scale Service Button
Performs ScaleSentry and Scale Service functions
With all weight removed from the
depending on the duration of the button press. See
scale, push this button to set the
the topic ScaleSentry / Scale Service Button, in this
scale to zero.
section for more information.
The LED indicator associated with
The LED indicator associated with this button indi-
this button indicates scale functions.
cates the current ScaleSentry condition.
3 Image Capture Button 6 Speaker
This button will be used for future Soundsa beeps, error tones and other audible sig-
image capture functions. nals to indicate good read, ScaleSentry alert, sys-
tem error and other conditions.
a. Some audible indications are configurable to be on or off, as well as offer their own programmable options for pitch, volume, etc.
Since audio indications are configurable, your unit may not be

programmed to sound all the indications as listed. For more
information, see the Programming section of this manual.
NOTE

LED and Audio Indications
Scanner and Scale LEDs

The Green Good Read indicator bar (see Figure 54) indicates scanner status, and the
Scale LED (see item #2 in Figure 55) is primarily used to show scale status (see
Table 16).
Table 16. Scanner and Scale LED Indications
LED
DURATION COMMENT
INDICATION
Scale (Yellow) LED on steady The scale is at rest and reads zero
Scale at Zeroa
weight. The scale is ready to weigh.
Scanner Activea Scanner (Green) LED on steady and

The scanner is ready for operation.
dim
(Normal Mode) Scanning is immediately available.
Good Read Scanner (Green) LED - bright flash Indicates a bar code has been read and
Indicationa decoded.
Indicates the scanner is in Label Pro-

Scanner (Green) LED - Continuous
Program Mode gramming Mode. Cycle power (or read
flashing
Indication an Exit Programming label) to exit Pro-
gramming Mode.
Scanner (Green) LED flashes slowly The scanner has automatically switched
Sleep Mode
10ms on, 1990ms off. off and the unit has entered Sleep Mode
Indication
due to extended inactivity.
Scanner Dis- Scanner (Green) LED blinks100ms on,

900ms off. Host has disabled scanning.
ableda
Audible low tone 1 second.

Field Replace-
Alternating Scanner/Scale /EAS and Serves notice that a fatal FRU failure
able Unit (FRU)
ScaleSentry LEDs flash continuouslyb. has been detected. Consult in this man-
Warning (Error
ual for more details.
Mode)
Scanner (Green) LED flashes a coded Occurs ONLY upon Volume/Tone button
sequence in concert with the speaker. push following a FRU warning. Enables
FRU Indication
service technicians to identify FRU fail-
ures.
Scanner (Green) LED - Continuous Indicates Boot ROM failure or Program

ROM Failure flashing 200ms on, 200ms off. ROM failure.
a. Certain functions of the Green and Yellow LEDs are selectable to be enabled or disabled. Your scanner may
not be programmed to display all indications.
b. For FRU error 9, the Deactivator LED (tri-color) is off.

Audio Indications
The speaker (beeper) mounted in the scanner’s bonnet will beep or sound other audio
indications to announce scanning, weighing, errors or other functions (see Table 17).
Beep indications specific to Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) are listed in the next
section.
The indications listed below are the factory default settings. Your
scanner may have been configured with different beeper set-
tings. For example, certain beeper indications may be turned off.
NOTE
Table 17. Audio Indications
AUDIO
DESCRIPTION OF SOUND COMMENT
INDICATION
Unique WAV file sound. Synthe-

Power-up tone sized tones ending with two Indicates the scanner is powering-on.
bell sounds.
Good Read One beep at current frequency The duration of the beep is also at the current
Beep and volume. setting.
One 200ms error beep at low
ROM Failure Indicates Boot ROM or Program ROM failure.
frequency.
A “Chirp” is used to indicate the following:
-Reading labels while in limited scanning
mode.
Chirp Six “Chirps” at highest fre-
-Label rejection during label programming.
Indications quency and current volume.
-A label with no data.
-Labels rejected through the auxiliary port
when in Scanner Diagnostics Mode.
The beeper sounds a series of
Bootload Entry beeps at highest frequency and See Error Codes in the Problem Isolation sec-
Indications current volume to indicate vari- tion for more details.
ous
This means that no interface has been
Null Interface 40 error beeps at highest vol-
selected. Refer to the Programming section
Selected ume, 20ms ON and 20 ms OFF.
for interface configuration information.

Deactivator LED
The tri-color Deactivator LED (item #4 in Figure 55) designates EAS deactivation
status (see Table 18). The table also provides information about special beeper
indications which can be sounded in response to changes in deactivation status.
Table 18. EAS Indications
EAS DEACTIVATION DISABLED
INDICATION LED DURATION EAS BEEPER COMMENT
Deactivation mode must be

Deactivation Deactivation (Tri-color) LED
OFF selected via programming.
Disabled is OFF
Reference EAS Mode.
ALL MODES (COUPLED, DECOUPLED, HYBRID or HOST)
Deactivation Deactivation (Tri-color) LED

is lit steadily Green. OFF Deactivation is ready.
Ready
EAS tag Deactivation (Tri-color) LED An EAS tag has been

flashes Red. OFF
Detected sensed in the scan volume.
Deactivation (Tri-color) LEDa

Power-up blinks ON/OFF Red. System is attempting to ini-
OFF
Initialization tialize EAS
Deactivation (Tri-color) LED

flashes Red while FRU Sta- Low frequency beep (1
EAS Error tus LED flashes error code second) EAS system is not on line.
nine (9).
COUPLED MODE ONLY
Deactivation (Tri-color) LED Good read beep fol- The EAS antenna has been
Deactivation flashes Red, then Orange, lows deactivation. triggered ON to deactivate a
Indicated then returns to Green. label following successful
bar code read.
Ticking sound (for

Manual Deactivation (Tri-color) LED configurable duration) The Manual EAS Deactiva-
Deactivation is lit steadily Green. tion Push Button was
in Progress pressed & releasedb.
Deactivation (Tri-color) LED High frequency beep

Manual flashes Red, then Orange, An EAS tag was success-
Deactivation then returns to Green. fully deactivated via manual
Successful push button.

Upon initiating this
Deactivation (Tri-color) LED Upon EAS malfunction/fail-
state (pressing EAS
Deactivate is flashing slowly Red. FRU ure, scanning function can
Button for 3 seconds):
EAS System Status LED displays error continue independent of
3 high-pitched beeps
When Failed code nine (9) EAS if the EAS button is
held for 3 seconds.
DECOUPLED MODE
Deactivation (Tri-color) LED

Deactivation flashes Red. An EAS tag has been suc-
EAS Beep OFF
Indicated cessfully deactivated.
HYBRID MODE
Deactivation (Tri-color) LED High frequency beep

Deactivation flashes Red, then Orange, An EAS tag has been suc-
Indicated then returns to Green. cessfully deactivated.
a. Additionally, the FRU LED (Health & Status Indicator located in the bottom of the optic cavity — visible through
the horizontal scan window) blinks the number ‘9’. If EAS deactivation fails to initiate, a low, error tone will be
sounded, and the FRU LED will display the error code ‘9’ steadily (without flashing).
b. Ticking sound will stop upon one of the following: 1) Manual EAS Deactivation Push Button is pressed and
released again, 2) EAS timer runs out, or 3) Following a successful EAS tag deactivation.
ScaleSentry / Scale Service Button

The ScaleSentry / Scale Service Button (item #5 in Figure 55) is used for multiple
functions as listed in Table 19.
Table 19. ScaleSentry / Scale Service Button Functions
PRESS
FUNCTION COMMENT
DURATION
If a ScaleSentry event is occurring, this will override the

Momentary Override scale sentry event. If no ScaleSentry event is occurring,
this will activate the manual tare function of the scale.
This mode allows system support personnel to trouble-
Scale shoot problems with the scale. Momentarily press the
4 Seconds Diagnostics Scale Zero Button or cycle power to exit Scale Diagnos-
Modea tics Mode. See the topic, Scale Error Reporting in the
Problem Isolation section for more details.
8 Seconds Resets Scanner Only system support personnel should perform a reset.
Momentary while in Scale A scanner reset can also be initiated by a momentary
Resets Scanner
Diagnostics Mode press of this button while in Scale Diagnostics Mode.
a. Diagnostics Mode is meant for use by trained systems support personnel. Users should not need to initiate this
function under normal circumstances.

EAS/CSS Button
The EAS/CSS Button (see item #4 in Figure 55) has configurable functions for both the
Sensormatic EAS system and the Customer Service Scanner (CSS). Refer to Table 20.
Use the Programming section to configure the button to operate always, or only
function when the scanner is enabled.
Table 20. EAS/CSS Button Functions
PRESS
FUNCTION COMMENT
DURATION
IMPORTANT: If the feature CSS Button Option is

Momentary a also enabled, a one-second press of the button
Manually initiates Sensor- will be required for EAS deactivation.
for EAS matic EAS deactivation
deactivation Place the item with the EAS tag downstreamb of
the horizontal scan window and push the button.
Momentary for Turns the Customer Support This allows the sales associate to control when
CSS ON/OFF Scanner (CSS) On and OFF customers are able to scan bar codes
If the feature CSS Button Option is also enabled,
a one-second press of the button is required for
1 Second for
Manually initiates Sensor- EAS deactivation.
EAS
matic EAS deactivation Place the item with the EAS tag downstream of
deactivation
the horizontal scan window and push the button
for one second.
EAS Failure Mode is indicatedc by:

- EAS LED blinks ON/OFF red, scanning disabled.
- FRU Status LED Indicator blinks ‘9’
Allows scanner to resume - Error tone is sounded for one second
3 Seconds
function despite EAS system Upon pressing the button for 3 seconds, the
upon EAS error
failure (non-fatal error) scanner will sound 3 high-pitched beeps, then
resume scan function. The EAS LED and FRU
Status LED will continue blinking as above, but
at a slower rate until EAS system function is
restored.
a. For use in Coupled Mode only

b. “Downstream” in this case is defined as being the downstream side of the scan window from the direction of
product flow, or scanning direction.
c. If the EAS failure corrects itself, blinking will stop and the EAS LED will turn green.

Scale Zero Button
The Scale Zero Button (item #1 in Figure 55) is used for multiple functions as listed in
Table 21.
The Scale Zero Button has no function in a “scanner only” model.
NOTE
Table 21. Scale Zero Button Functions
PRESS
FUNCTION COMMENT
DURATION
When programmed to do so, the Scale Indicator LED (item#4 in Fig-

ure 55) should be lit when no weight is on the scale, indicating
Momentary Zero Scale
scale at zero. If it is not, press the switch to zero the scale. The unit
will sound a “click” upon pressing the button.

Scanner Control Button
The Scanner Control Button (item #1 in Figure 55) also performs multiple functions
depending upon the duration of time it is pressed:
Volume changes made using the Scanner Control Button are lost when
the scanner is powered-down and are reset to the factory default setting.
If you wish to permanently change the volume, use the special program-
NOTE ming labels in the Programming section.
Table 22. Scanner Control Button Functions
PRESS
FUNCTION COMMENT
DURATION
Alternatively, the scanner can be awakened by:

Momentary
Wakes scanner from - Moving an object through the scan zone.
(when scanner
Sleep Mode - A weight change on the scale.
is asleep)
- Scanning with an attached auxiliary scanner.
Press the push button momentarily to increase speaker
Momentary volume. When the loudest volume is reached, a repeated
(when scanner Increments volume press of the push button cycles volume back to the lowest
is awake) setting, then volume increases on subsequent press(es).
Five volume levels are available.
Press the push button for one second to increment the
speaker tone. When the highest tone is reached, a
1 Second Increments tone repeated 1 second press of the push button cycles tone
back to the lowest tone setting, then tone increases on
subsequent press(es).
This mode allows system support personnel to trouble-
shoot problems with the scanner. Upon entering Scanner
Diagnostic Mode, view the Health & Status Indicator to
Scanner Diagnostics view Interface Type, Bootloader Version Number, Applica-
5 to 9 Seconds
Modea tion Version Number and Configuration File Number. This
mode is used to determine if a scanner can read bar
codes. Press the button for ten seconds or cycle power to
exit Scanner Diagnostics Mode and reset the scanner.
10 Seconds Resets Scannerb (soft Only system support personnel should perform a reset.
reset)
a. By standard default, this function is normally disabled to prevent accidental activation by users.
b. Users should not perform scanner resets except under the direction of trained systems support personnel.

Calibration Switch
This switch initiates the scale’s calibration routine. A certified weight set is needed to
perform the scale calibration steps detailed in Chapter 6, Calibration Procedures. This
switch is not included in scanners without scale modules.
Calibration Switch Seal

This seal allows you to secure the Calibration Switch access cover and restrict access
to the Calibration Switch. If the calibration seal is broken or missing, you may be
prohibited from operating the scale without recertification. Check local and state
requirements for specific restrictions.
Calibration Switch Cover

This cover restricts access to the Calibration Switch to help guard against
unauthorized tampering when sealed. See Figure 56.
There are regulations that must be followed in order to ensure compli-

LEGAL NOTE ance when operating a weighing device such as the scanner/scale. Fail-
ure to observe and comply with these regulations could result in legal
action.
LEGAL NOTE
Figure 56. Calibration Switch Cover
1 Calibration Seal Location Calibration Switch Opening. Use a

3 long, blunt object to reach in and
2 Calibration Access Cover press the Calibration Switch.

NOTES

Appendix B
Cable Information
Introduction
The following pages contain pinout information, enabling you to create standard
interface cables for use in interconnecting the scanner, scale, external handheld
scanner, and POS terminal.
General Specifications
Wire Requirements
• Cable length should not exceed 15 feet.
• Wire gauge = Standard for RJ-45 connectors (28-26 AWG).
• 26 AWG wire size can improve performance for longer cables.

External Cable Pinouts
Connector Hardware RJ45, 10 Position
AUXILIARY
RS-232 IBM EAS COMM PORT
PORT
Scan- External Handheld Sensormatic Control

PIN Scale IBM IBM USB
ner Input Box
+5v pul-
lup or +5V pul- +5V pul-
1 N/C N/C USB D+ ERI OUT
Scale lup lup
Sentry
Clear To
CTS No Clear To
2 Send N/C CTS in VCC5
in Connection Send (input)
(input)
EAS LBL EAS

SCL service No Connec-
3 N/C N/C USB D- N/C DEACT Deactiva-
BTN tion
EN~ tion
Request To Request To
RTS No
4 Send (out- LINE B RTS out Send (out- SIGNAL GND
out Connection
put) put)
Receive EAS LBL

No Receive EAS
5 RxD in Data N/C RxD in DETECT
Connection Data (input) tag Detect
(input) EN~
Transmit Transmit
TxD No Signal
6 Data (out- LINE A TxD out Data (out- GND
out Connection Ground
put) put)
No +12V out-
7 ERI Scale LED N/C N/C EAS TxD
Connection put or N/C
+5V out
No
8 N/C 12V or 5V N/C (500mA +5V out EAS RxD (SHIFT UP)
Connection
max)
GN Signal Signal Signal

9 GND GND NO PIN (BLANK)
D Ground Ground Ground
No Connec-
10 N/C SCL BTN N/C VBUS N/C NO PIN (BLANK)
tion

Peripheral Ports / Connectors
POWER
REMOTE DISPLAY USB
CABLE
Hardware:
PIN Hardware: 4 pin SDL Type Ba
3 pin single row
1 +12 OUT +12 OUT VBUS Earth
LINE_A
2 Line A Display USB D- Signal GND
DSPLY
LINE_B Line B Dis-

3 USBD+ 12V
DSPLY play
4 GND Ground GND
a. The USB column in this table is for the type B connection only. The dual
stacked USB type A connections provide standard USB pinouts.

NOTES

Appendix C
Keypad
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you would select
digits/characters from a keypad. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the

Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you would select
digits/characters from a keypad. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the

Appendix D
Host Commands
Accepting Commands from an RS-232 Scanner Host
The scanner responds to the following RS-232 commands:
COMMAND ASCII HEX COMMENT
Enable Scanner E 0x45
Disable Scanner D 0x44
Reset Scanner R 0x52
Not On File Indica-

F 0x46 Long series of beeps
tion
Beep Good Read
B 0x42 Beeps if Good Read Beep is enabled
Tone
Force Good Read
0x01 Beeps regardless of beep setting
Tone
Bel 0x07 Force Good Read Tone
Identification
i 0x69 Returns long responsea
request
Health request h 0x68 Returns long responsea
Status request s 0x73 Returns long responsea
a. Call Tech Support for information.
If one of the above commands is received, the scanner will perform the steps
indicated for the command. Host commands for other interfaces is also available.
Contact Tech Support for more details.

NOTES

Appendix E
Factory Defaults
The following table provides a listing of the most common factory settings for the
interfaces shown.
Some of the individual interfaces listed in the defaults table below appear in
the same column since they share similar feature settings with few (if any)
exceptions.
Keep in mind though, that the actual configuration storage area for each
NOTE interface is unique and that updates & changes to factory defaults can be
made at any time without notice.
Table 23. Factory Default Settings

IBM
RS-232 RS-232 USB COM
Default Port 17
Feature RS-232 Wincor- Single Keyboard / USB OEM
Master Port 9B
Nixdorf Cable USB TEC
Port 5B
Imaging Features
Image Camera 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Image Format 00 (JPG) 00 (JPG) 00 (JPG) 00 (JPG) 00 (JPG) 00 (JPG) 00 (JPG) 00 (JPG)
Image Size 00 (VGA) 00 (VGA) 00 (VGA) 00 (VGA) 00 (VGA) 00 (VGA) 00 (VGA) 00 (VGA)
Image Brightness Level 0 Level 0 Level 0 Level 0 Level 0 Level 0 Level 0 Level 0
Image Contrast Level 0 Level 0 Level 0 Level 0 Level 0 Level 0 Level 0 Level 0
64 (Com- 64 (Com- 64 (Com- 64 (Com- 64 (Com- 64 (Com- 64 (Com- 64 (Com-

Image Compres-
pression = pression = pression = pression = pression = pression = pression = pression =
sion
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
CSS Button Option 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
1D Double Read
28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms)
Timeout
2D Double Read
Timeout
Digital Watermark
01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
(DWM) Enable

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
Digitally Water-
marked (DWM) Dou- 0.5 Sec. 0.5 Sec. 0.5 Sec. 0.5 Sec. 0.5 Sec. 0.5 Sec. 0.5 Sec. 0.5 Sec.
ble Read Timeout
Label Gone Time- 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

out (16 cycles) (16 cycles) (16 cycles) (16 cycles) (16 cycles) (16 cycles) (16 cycles) (16 cycles)
Sleep Mode Timer 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes
1D Inverse Read
00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Control
2D Inverse Read
Control
Illumination Con-
trol
2D Contrast
Improvement
Good Read LED Idle

02 (on dim) 02 (on dim) 02 (on dim) 02 (on dim) 02 (on dim) 02 (on dim) 02 (on dim) 02 (on dim)
State
Good Read Lamp

Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green
Color
Scanner Control
01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01
Button Options
Power-up Tone
01 (1 beep) 01 (1 beep) 01 (1 beep) 01 (1 beep) 01 (1 beep) 01 (1 beep) 01 (1 beep) 01 (1 beep)
Control
Good Read Beep

Control
Good Read Beep

01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.)
Frequency
Good Read Beep

Length
Good Read Beep

02 (med) 02 (med) 02 (med) 02 (med) 02 (med) 02 (med) 02 (med) 02 (med)
Volume
Good Read When 00 (after 00 (after 00 (after 00 (after 00 (after 00 (after 00 (after 00 (after
to Indicate decode) decode) decode) decode) decode) decode) decode) decode)
03 (zero 03 (zero 03 (zero 03 (zero 03 (zero 03 (zero 03 (zero

Scale Zero Button
button & button & button & button & button & button & button &
and Scale Indicator
LED dis- LED dis- LED dis- LED dis- LED dis- LED dis- LED dis-
LED
connected) connected) connected) connected) connected) connected) connected)
Scale Sentry 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Scale Sentry Over-

ride Button
Scale Sentry Mode 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Scale Sentry Visual

Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Indicator
Scale Sentry Beep

Enable

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
Scale Sentry GRI

Enable
Scale Sentry Adap-

tive Scale Indica- Active High Active High Active High Active High Active High Active High Active High Active High
tion State
Scale Enable 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Scale Diagnostics
01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Mode
Scale Stale Weight

21 (330ms) 21 (330ms)
Timeout
03 (non- 03 (non- 03 (non- 03 (non- 03 (non- 03 (non-

Scale Enforced
zerro for 4 zerro for 4 zerro for 4 00 (disable) zerro for 4 zerro for 4 zerro for 4
Zero Return
min.) min.) min.) min.) min.) min.)
Scale Interface 04 (RS-232 04 (RS-232 04 (RS-232 04 (RS-232 04 (RS-232

Type SASI) SASI) SASI) SASI SASI
ICL Scale Interface

DC1 Character 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Delay
Scale Calibration
00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Notification
Scale Intercharac- 00 00 00 00
ter Delay (no delay) (no delay) (no delay) (no delay)
Adaptive Scale LED

Zero LED Zero LED Zero LED Zero LED Zero LED Zero LED Zero LED Zero LED
Option
Remote Display —
01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Enable/Disable
Auxiliary Port Mode 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Auxiliary USB Mode 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
USB Device Port Topside Topside Topside Topside Topside Topside Topside Topside
Location Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector
Productivity Index
Reporting (PIR) /
Cashier Training
(CT)
PIR/CT Auxiliary
00 (19200) 00 (19200) 00 (19200) 00 (19200) 00 (19200) 00 (19200) 00 (19200) 00 (19200)
Port Baud Rate
EAS Features
EAS Mode 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
EAS Notification 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
EAS Security Level 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.) 01 (med.)
EAS Good Beep

Mode
EAS Beep Duration 008 (80ms) 008 (80ms) 008 (80ms) 008 (80ms) 008 (80ms) 008 (80ms) 008 (80ms) 008 (80ms)

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
03 (retry 03 (retry 03 (retry 03 (retry 03 (retry 03 (retry 03 (retry 03 (retry

EAS Retry Count
3 times) 3 times) 3 times) 3 times) 3 times) 3 times) 3 times) 3 times)
02 (enable 02 (enable 02 (enable 02 (enable 02 (enable 02 (enable 02 (enable 02 (enable

EAS Exception But- only when only when only when only when only when only when only when only when
ton scanner scanner scanner scanner scanner scanner scanner scanner
enabled) enabled) enabled) enabled) enabled) enabled) enabled) enabled)
EAS Deactivation
Duration — Cou- 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms) 28 (400ms)
pled
EAS Deactivation
Duration — Retry
EAS Deactivation
Duration — Excep- 64 (1 sec.) 64 (1 sec.) 64 (1 sec.) 64 (1 sec.) 64 (1 sec.) 64 (1 sec.) 64 (1 sec.) 64 (1 sec.)
tion
EAS Pre-Read Time 19 (250ms) 19 (250ms) 19 (250ms) 19 (250ms) 19 (250ms) 19 (250ms) 19 (250ms) 19 (250ms)
EAS Error Tones 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
ERI Active State 00 (low) 00 (low) 00 (low) 00 (low) 00 (low) 00 (low) 00 (low) 00 (low)
ERI Timeout 02 (20ms) 02 (20ms) 02 (20ms) 02 (20ms) 02 (20ms) 02 (20ms) 02 (20ms) 02 (20ms)
Maximum Host- 000 (no 000 (no 000 (no 000 (no 000 (no 000 (no 000 (no 000 (no
Transmitted Mes- gen. limit gen. limit gen. limit gen. limit gen. limit gen. limit gen. limit gen. limit
sage Length imposed) imposed) imposed) imposed) imposed) imposed) imposed) imposed)
IBM Interface
00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00
Options
IBM Scale Address 6E 6E 6E
IBM Transmit
Labels in Code 39 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Format
46XX Number of
06 06 06
Host Resets
46XX Label Slicing 01 (multi 01 (multi 01 (multi

Control pieces) pieces) pieces)
46XX Maximum 064 (64 064 (64 064 (64

Label Slice Length characters) characters) characters)
USB OEM Interface

02 02 02 02 02 02 01 02
Options
USB OEM Scanner 00 (table 00 (table 00 (table

Device Type top) top) top)
RS-232 Baud Rate 01 (9600) 01 (9600) 01 (9600) 01 (9600) 01 (9600)
RS-232 Number of 01 (8 data 01 (8 data 01 (8 data 00 (7 data 01 (8 data

Data Bits bits) bits) bits) bits) bits)

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
RS-232 Number of 00 (1 stop 00 (1 stop 00 (1 stop 00 (1 stop 00 (1 stop

Stop Bits bit) bit) bit) bit) bit)
RS-232 Parity 00 (none) 00 (none) 02 (odd) 02 (odd) 00 (none)
01 (enable
RS-232 Hardware
00 (disable) 00 (disable) CTS flow 00 (disable)
Control
control)
RS-232 Interchar- 00 (no 00 (no 00 (no 00 (no

acter Delay delay) delay) delay) delay)
RS-232 Software
00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Flow Control
RS-232 Ignore Host

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Commands
RS-232 TTL 00 (normal) 00 (normal) 00 (normal) 00 (normal)
RS-232 TTL Invert 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
RS-232 Beep on
00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
ASCII BEL
RS-232 Beep After

00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Weigh
Beep on Not on File 01 (low vol) 01 (low vol) 01 (low vol) 01 (low vol) 01 (low vol) 01 (low vol) 01 (low vol)
RS-232 ACK NAK

00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Enable
RS-232 ACK Char-

06 (ACK) 06 (ACK) 06 (ACK) 06 (ACK)
acter
RS-232 NAK Char-

15 (NAK) 15 (NAK) 15 (NAK) 15 (NAK)
acter
RS-232 Retry on
01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
ACK NAK Timeout
RS-232 ACK NAK

01 (200ms) 01 (200ms) 01 (200ms) 01 (200ms)
Timeout Value
RS-232 ACK NAK 03 03 03 03

Retry Count (3 retries) (3 retries) (3 retries) (3 retries)
RS-232 ACK NAK

00 (ignore) 00 (ignore) 00 (ignore) 00 (ignore)
Error Handling
RS-232 Indicate
Transmission Fail- 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
ure
Single Cable RS- 00 (scan- 00 (scan-

232 Scanner Only ner/scale ner/scale
Protocol RS-232) RS-232)
Single Cable RS- 05 (RTS 05 (RTS

232 RTS CTS Selec- high, wait high, wait
tion for CTS) for CTS)
Single Cable RS-

00 (disable) 00 (disable)
232 Use BCC

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
Single Cable RS-

232 Use ACK/NAK
Single Cable RS-

01 (enable) 01 (enable)
232 Use STX
Set Single Cable

RS-232 STX Char- 053 (S) 053 (S)
acter
Single Cable RS-

01 (enable) 01 (enable)
232 Use ETX
Set Single Cable

RS-232 ETX Char- 00D (CR) 00D (CR)
acter
Single Cable RS-

00 (std. 00 (std.
232 Datalogic
protocol) protocol)
Extensions
Single Cable RS-

00 (do not 00 (do not
232 Pacesetter
send) send)
Plus
USB Keyboard and

Keyboard Wedge
01 (10ms) 01 (10ms)
Intercharacter
Delay
Keyboard Wedge
No Keyboard Sup- 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
port
USB Keyboard and

Keyboard Wedge
Send Control Char-
acters
USB Keyboard and

Keyboard Wedge 00 (USA) 00 (USA)
Country Mode
Keyboard Wedge
0A (100ms) 0A (100ms)
Quiet Interval
USB Keyboard and

00 (caps 00 (caps
Keyboard Wedge
lock OFF) lock OFF)
Caps Lock State
Data Editing
00 (no case 00 (no case 00 (no case 00 (no case 00 (no case 00 (no case 00 (no case 00 (no case
Case Conversion
convers’n) convers’n) convers’n) convers’n) convers’n) convers’n) convers’n) convers’n)
FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF

Character Conver- FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF
sion (no char. (no char. (no char. (no char. (no char. (no char. (no char. (no char.
convers’n) convers’n) convers’n) convers’n) convers’n) convers’n) convers’n) convers’n)
00 (no 00 (no 00 (no 00 (no 00 (no 00 (no 00 (no 00 (no

Global Prefix
prefix) prefix) prefix) prefix) prefix) prefix) prefix) prefix)
Global Suffix 0D00 (CR) 0D00 (CR) 0D00 (CR) 0000 (CR) 0D00 (CR) 0D00 (CR) 0D00 (CR) 0D00 (CR)

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
Global AIM ID
00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Enable
01 (Enable 01 (Enable 01 (Enable 01 (Enable 01 (Enable 01 (Enable

Label ID Control
as prefix) as prefix) as prefix) as prefix) as prefix) as prefix)
00 (no 00 (no 00 (no 00 (no 00 (no 00 (no

Global Mid-Label ID mid-label mid-label mid-label mid-label mid-label mid-label
ID) ID) ID) ID) ID) ID)
01 (enable 01 (enable 01 (enable 01 (enable 01 (enable 01 (enable 01 (enable 01 (enable

Coupon Control
UPC-A) UPC-A) UPC-A) UPC-A) UPC-A) UPC-A) UPC-A) UPC-A)
Coupon Label Pri-

0.2 Sec. 0.2 Sec. 0.2 Sec. 0.2 Sec. 0.2 Sec. 0.2 Sec. 0.2 Sec. 0.2 Sec.
ority Timer
UPC-A Enable 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
UPC-A Number
System Character 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Transmission
UPC-A Check Char-

01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 00 (disable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
acter Transmission
UPC-A Minimum
01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read)
Read
Expand UPC-A to
00 (disable) 00 (disable) 01 (enable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
EAN-13
UPC-E Enable 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
UPC-E Number
System Character 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Transmission
UPC-E Check Char-

01 (enable) 01 (enable) 00 (disable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
acter Transmission
Expand UPC-E to
UPC-A
Expand UPC-E to
EAN-13
UPC-E Minimum
Read
EAN-13 Enable 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
EAN-13 First Char-

acter Transmission
EAN-13 Check
Character Trans- 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 00 (disable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
mission
EAN-13 ISBN Con-

version Enable
EAN-13 Minimum
Read
EAN-8 Enable 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
EAN-8 Check Char-

01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 00 (disable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
acter Transmission
Expand EAN-8 to
EAN-13
EAN-8 Minimum
Read
EAN-8 Guard
Insertion
EAN-8 Guard Sub-

stitution
EAN-8 Stitch Exact

Label Halves
EAN-8 Stitch Unlike

Label Halves
In-Store Printed
Label Minimum 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read)
Read
UPC/EAN Correla-
tion
UPC/EAN Guard
Insertion
UPC/EAN Stitch
Exact Label Halves
UPC/EAN Stitch
Unlike Label Halves
UPC/EAN Mini-
mum Segment 05 (5 char.) 05 (5 char.) 05 (5 char.) 05 (5 char.) 05 (5 char.) 05 (5 char.) 05 (5 char.) 05 (5 char.)
Length
Price Weight Check 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Enable EAN Two

Label
EAN Two Label

Minimum Read
EAN Two Label

Combined Trans- 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
mission
Addons disable all disable all disable all disable all disable all disable all disable all disable all
P2 Addon Mini- 02 (2 02 (2 02 (2 02 (2 02 (2 02 (2 02 (2 02 (2
mum Read reads) reads) reads) reads) reads) reads) reads) reads)
P5 Addon Mini-
mum Read
GTIN Enable 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
DataBar Omnidi-
rectional Enable

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
DataBar Omnidi-
rectional/EAN-128 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Emulation
DataBar Omnidi-
rectional 2D Com- 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
ponent Enable
DataBar Omnidi-
rectional Minimum 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read)
Read
DataBar Omnidi-
rectional Double 2.5 Sec. 2.5 Sec. 2.5 Sec. 2.5 Sec. 2.5 Sec. 2.5 Sec. 2.5 Sec. 2.5 Sec.
Read Timeout
DataBar Expanded
Enable
DataBar Expanded
EAN-128 Emula- 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
tion
DataBar Expanded
2D Component 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Enable
DataBar Expanded
Minimum Read
DataBar Expanded 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Length Control (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)
DataBar Expanded
01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01
Length 1
DataBar Expanded
4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A
Length 2
DataBar Expanded
Reverse Retry
Code 39 Enable 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 00 (disable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Code 39 Start Stop

Character Trans- 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
mission
Code 39 Check
Character Calcula- 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
tion
Code 39 Check
Character Trans- 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
mission
Code 39 Full ASCII 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Code 39 Minimum
Read
Code 39 Correlation 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Code 39 Length 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Control (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
Code 39 Length 1 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02
Code 39 Length 2 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
Code 39 Stitching 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Code 39 Require
Margins
Code 32 Italian
Pharmacode 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Enable
Code 32 Start Stop

Character Trans- 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
mission
Code 32 Check
Character Trans- 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
mission
Code 128 Enable 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Code 128 Transmit

Function Charac- 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
ters
Expand Code128 to
Code 39
Code 128 Mini-

mum Read
Code 128 Correla-

tion
Code 128 Length 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Code 128 Length 1 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01
Code 128 Length 2 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
EAN-128 Enable 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I
2 OF 5) Enable
I 2 of 5 Check Char-
acter Calculation
I 2 of 5 Check Char-
acter Transmission
I 2 of 5 Minimum
Read
I 2 of 5 Correlation 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
I 2 of 5 Length Con- 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
trol (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)
I 2 of 5 Length 1 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06
I 2 of 5 Length 2 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
I 2 of 5 Stitching 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Codabar Enable 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Codabar Start Stop

mission
Codabar Start Stop 03 (abcd/ 03 (abcd/ 03 (abcd/ 03 (abcd/ 03 (abcd/ 03 (abcd/ 03 (abcd/ 03 (abcd/
Character Set abcd) abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd abcd
Codabar Start Stop

Character Match
Codabar Check
Character Calcula- 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
tion
Codabar Check
mission
Codabar Minimum
Read
Codabar Correla-
tion
Codabar Length 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Codabar Length 1 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03
Codabar Length 2 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
Codabar Stitching 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Codabar Require
Margins
Code 93 Enable 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Code 93 Minimum
Read
Code 93 Correlation 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Code 93 Length 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Code 93 Length 1 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01
Code 93 Length 2 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
MSI Enable 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
MSI Check Charac-

01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
ter Calculation
MSI Number of
00 (1 char) 00 (1 char) 00 (1 char) 00 (1 char) 00 (1 char) 00 (1 char)
Check Characters
MSI Check Charac-

01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
ter Transmission

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
MSI Minimum Read 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read) 01 (1 read)
MSI Correlation 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
00 00 00 00 00 00
MSI Length Control
(variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)
MSI Length 1 04 04 04 04 04 04
MSI Length 2 10 10 10 10 10 10
MSI Stitching 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Standard 2 of 5
Enable
Standard 2 of 5
Check Character 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Calculation
Standard 2 of 5
Check Character 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
Transmission
Standard 2 of 5
Minimum Read
Standard 2 of 5
Correlation
Standard 2 of 5 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Standard 2 of 5
08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08
Length 1
Standard 2 of 5
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
Length 2
Standard 2 of 5
Stitching
Data Matrix Enable 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Data Matrix Length 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Set Data Matrix

0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001
Length 1
Set Data Matrix

0320 0320 0320 0320 0320 0320 0320 0320
Length 2
PDF 417 Enable 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable) 01 (enable)
PDF 417 Length 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Set PDF 417

0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001
Length 1
Set PDF 417

0A96 0A96 0A96 0A96 0A96 0A96 0A96 0A96
Length 2

IBM
Default Port 17
Master Port 9B
Port 5B
PDF 417 Read

00 (none) 00 (none) 00 (none) 00 (none) 00 (none) 00 (none) 00 (none) 00 (none)
Option
Micro PDF 417

Enable
Micro PDF 417 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Set Micro PDF 417

0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001
Length 1
Set Micro PDF 417

016E 016E 016E 016E 016E 016E 016E 016E
Length 2
00 (Micro 00 (Micro 00 (Micro 00 (Micro 00 (Micro 00 (Micro 00 (Micro 00 (Micro

Micro PDF 417 128 PDF 417 PDF 417 PDF 417 PDF 417 PDF 417 PDF 417 PDF 417 PDF 417
Emulation AIM ID & AIM ID & AIM ID & AIM ID & AIM ID & AIM ID & AIM ID & AIM ID &
label type) label type) label type) label type) label type) label type) label type) label type)
QR Code Enable 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
QR Code Length 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Set QR Code
0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001
Length 1
Set QR Code
0A96 0A96 0A96 0A96 0A96 0A96 0A96 0A96
Length 2
QR Code URL Link

Enable
Micro QR Code
Enable
Micro QR Code 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Set Micro QR Code

0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001
Length 1
Set Micro QR Code

0E74 0E74 0E74 0E74 0E74 0E74 0E74 0E74
Length 2
Aztec Enable 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable) 00 (disable)
Aztec Length Con- 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

trol (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)
Set Aztec Length 1 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001
Set Aztec Length 2 0E74 0E74 0E74 0E74 0E74 0E74 0E74 0E74

NOTES

Appendix F
Handheld Data Format Requirements
This appendix provides application notes to describe the general format of data that
can be accepted by the scanner through the auxiliary port as transmitted from a
handheld scanner.
Handheld Data Format Requirements General

• RS232 - 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity.
• RS-232 RTS is used to “bracket” the data received from the handheld: RTS must
be asserted high during data transmission, and de-asserted after label trans-
mission is complete.
No other flow control mechanisms are required or supported.
There must be a delay of at least 2 bit cell times (approximately 208 microsec-
onds) following the transmission of the last character before de-assertion of the
RTS signal.
The de-assertion of the RTS signal must happen in less than 50 milliseconds
after the last character is transmitted.
• USB handhelds enumerate as a CDC ACM serial device.
• USB devices should also bracket the data with the RTS equivalent.
• The time between character transmission can be no longer than 50 milliseconds.
• Symbologies requiring fixed lengths (UPC/EAN) will enforce length requirements
for validation of the label.
• Handheld will be required to transmit start and stop characters for Codabar and
Code39 labels.
• Appropriate industrial length requirements will be enforced (if configured) for
validation of the label.
• Maximum label lengths will be enforced for label validation (i.e. labels longer
than the maximum label size will not be validated).
• Standard Datalogic formats generally use a single prefix character. see specific
formats section.
• Maximum label size allowed including identifiers is 2714 bytes
• Recommendations:
•Handheld should not be configured for audible label read indication.
•Handheld should not be configured for visual label read indication.
•Handheld should not be configured for continuous label read mode.

Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements
The following sections describe label transmission formats that are typically observed
in factory configurations of Datalogic handheld scanners.
UPC-A
• Number system must be included in label data
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘A’ - total length including prefix must be 13
• Example: ‘A060992011187’
UPC-A with 2-Digit Supplemental

• Supplemental data is appended to base label
• Example: ‘A06099201118712’
UPC-A with 5-Digit Supplemental

• Example: ‘A06099201118712345’
UPC-A with Code128 Supplemental

• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘A’ - total length including prefix must be
greater or equal to 19 (code 128 supplemental codes are variable length having a
minimum of 2 data characters)
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form ‘8100’, ‘8101’ or
‘8102’
• Example: ‘A0609920111878100000951’
UPC-E
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘E’ - total length including prefix must be 9
• Example: ‘E09988750’

UPC-E with 2-Digit Supplemental
• Example: ‘E0998875012’
UPC-E with 5-Digit Supplemental

• Example: ‘E0998875012345’
UPC-E with Code128 Supplemental

• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘E’ - total length including prefix must be
‘8102’
• Example: ‘E099887508101000951’
EAN8
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters ‘FF’ - total length including prefix must be 10
• Example: ‘FF00210126’
EAN8 with 2-Digit Supplemental

• Example: ‘FF0021012612’

• Example: ‘FF0021012612345’

EAN8 with Code128 Supplemental
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters ‘FF’ - total length including prefix must be
greater than 16 (code 128 supplemental codes are variable length having a mini-
mum of 2 data characters)
‘8102’
• Example: ‘FF002101268102000951’
EAN13
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘F’- total length including prefix must be 14
• Example: ‘F1101234567891’

• Example: ‘F110123456789112’

• Example: ‘F110123456789112345’
EAN13 with Code128 Supplemental

• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘F’- total length including prefix must be
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form ‘8100’, ‘8101’ or ‘8102’
• Example: ‘F11012345678918100000951’
Code 39
• Check character must be included in label data
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and excluding prefix
character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or vari-
able label length control for this symbology type.
• Start and stop characters “*” must be included in label
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘*’
• Example : ‘**CODE39.TEST*’

Code 39-Pharmacode (Code 32)
character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or vari-
able label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘p’
• Example: ‘p*123456789*’
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix character must
meet requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or variable label length
control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘i’
• Example: ‘*i0123456789’
Codabar
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix character must meet
requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or variable label length con-
trol for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘%’
• Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set forth by the
scanner configuration item CI_CBAR_START_STOP_CHAR_MATCH
• Start stop character sets s must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and must be
included in the label
• Example: ‘%s$99.95s’
Code 128
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘#’
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the
main scanner’s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Function characters may be transmitted as a hexadecimal value 8x. Where x cor-
relates to function characters 1 thru 4 as follows:
•x80 = function code 1
• For Code128 programming labels the format is of the general form ‘#/82nnnnn/
r ‘ - /82 is hexadecimal 82 and /r is carriage return
• Example: ‘#Code_128.Test’

MSI Plessey
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix character must meet
requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or variable label length con-
trol for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘@’
• Example: ‘@144769254’
Code 93
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘&’
• Example: ‘&Code93-test’
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’
• Check character must be included in label
• Application identifier “01” must follow the prefix and precede the base label
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be 16 characters.
• Example: ‘R40101044123456789’
GS1 DataBar Expanded

• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be at least 1 character. Maximum
length is the maximum label size supported by the scanner.
• The format of the label must not be of the same format as RSS-14 (application id
‘01’ & length equal to 16)
• Example: ‘R4002900123456789083103001750’
Standard 2 of 5 (S 2 of 5)
• Prefix must be ASCII character ‘s’
• Example ‘s1234567890’
PDF 417
• Prefix must be ASCII character ‘P’
• Label length excluding prefix character cannot exceed 2714 characters +3, or
2717 characters. In addition to this, label length excluding prefix character must
• Example: ‘Ppdf test label’

AIM Formats
AIM specifies a 3-character string that is attached as a prefix to the label data for
transmission. Because AIM specifies one identifier for UPCA, UPCE and EAN13 labels,
UPCA, UPCE and EAN13 will be received from the handheld and transmitted by the
scanner as EAN13. The ‘]’ character must be the first character received in the label
transmission from the handheld.
The following sections describe the prefix strings and identify what specific label
characteristics can be supported.
UPC-A
• AIM does not specify UPCA as a separate symbology using this transmission
format - labels will be transmitted as EAN13 (refer to section 8.5.4.3).
• Examples: ‘]E00060992011187’ or ‘]E30060992011187’
UPC-E
• AIM does not specify UPCE as a separate symbology using this transmission for-
mat - labels will be transmitted as EAN13 (refer to section 8.5.4.3)..
• Examples: ‘]E00000000998875’ or ‘]E30000000998875’
EAN13
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]E0’ or ']E3'.
• Total length including prefix must be 16.
• Examples: ‘]E01101234567891’ or ‘]E31101234567891’.
EAN8
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]E4’.
• Total length including prefix must be 11.
• Example: ‘]E400210126’

2-Digit Add-on
• Add-on data is appended to the end of an EAN base label.
• If the main label has an AIM Id prefix with the ASCII characters ']E0', the add-on
data must have an AIM Id prefix with the ASCII characters ‘]E1’.
• If the add-on data has an AIM Id prefix, the length of add-on data including AIM
Id prefix must be 5.
data does not have an AIM Id prefix.
• If the add-on data does not have an AIM Id prefix, the length of add-on data
must be 2.
• Examples: add-on portion is highlighted data is underlined
UPC-A 2-digit add-on ‘]E00060992011187]E112’

UPC-E 2-digit add-on ‘]E00000000998875]E112’
EAN8 2-digit add-on ‘]E400210126]E112’
UPC-A 2-digit add-on ']E3006099201118712
UPC-E 2-digit add-on ‘]E3000000099887512’
EAN13 2-digit add-on ‘]E3110123456789112’
5-Digit Add-on
• Add-on data is appended to the end of an EAN base label.
data must have an AIM Id prefix with the ASCII characters ‘]E2’.
• If the add-on data has an AIM Id prefix, the length of add-on data including AIM
Id prefix must be 8.
data does not have an AIM Id prefix.
• If the add-on data does not have an AIM Id prefix, the length of add-on data
must be 5.
• Examples: add-on portion is highlighted data is underlined
UPC-A 5-digit add-on ‘]E00060992011187]E212345’

UPC-E 5-digit add-on ‘]E00000000998875]E212345’
UPC-A 5-digit add-on ‘]E3006099201118712345’
UPC-E 5-digit add-on ']E3000000099887512345’
EAN13 5-digit add-on ‘]E3110123456789112345’

Code128 Add-on
Code 128 add-on is not supported in the AIM format.
Bookland
• The ‘Bookland’ / ISBN code will be formatted as a vendor specific AIM label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]X0’
• Length of label data including prefix is 13.
• Examples: ‘]X01234567890’
Code 39
characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or
variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]A0’ or ‘]A1’
• Example: ‘]A0*CODE39.TEST*’
Codabar
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix characters must
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]F0’
• Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set forth by the
scanner configuration item CI_CBAR_START_STOP_CHAR_MATCH
• Start stop character sets s must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and must be
included in the label
• Example: ‘]F0s$99.95s’
MSI Plessey
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix characters must
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]M0’
• Example: ‘]M0144769254’
Code 93
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]G0’
• Label length excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by
the main scanner’s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Example : ‘]G0Code93-test’

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]e0’
• Check character must be included in label
• Application identifier “01” must follow the prefix and precede the base label
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be 16 characters.
• Example: ‘]e00101044123456789’
GS1 DataBar Expanded

• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]e0’
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be at least 1 character. Maximum
length is the maximum label size supported by the scanner.
• The format of the label must not be of the same format as RSS-14 (application id
& length equal to 16)
• Example: ‘]e002900123456789083103001750’
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix characters must
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ‘]I1’ (other prefixes specify different check
character properties which are not supported).
• Example: ‘]I10123456789’
Code 128 / EAN 128

• Prefix must be either ASCII characters ‘]C0’, ‘]C1’ or ‘]C2’
• If CI_EAN128_ENABLED is TRUE and prefix is ‘]C1’, label will be identified as an
EAN128 otherwise it is identified as a Code 128.
• A prefix of ‘]C0’ designates that no function code is present in the 1st or 2nd
character position
• A prefix of ‘]C2’ designates that a function code 1 is present in the 2nd character.
• Example : ‘]C0Code_128.Test’
Standard 2 of 5 (S 2 of 5)
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]S0’
• Label length excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by
the main scanner’s fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Example : ‘]S01234567890’

PDF 417
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘]L0’ thru ']L5' ('0' thru '5' inclusive)
• Example : ‘]L0pdf_test_label’
Data Matrix
• Prefix must be ASCII characters `]d0' thru ']d6' ('0' thru '6' inclusive)
main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Example : `]d0dm_label_test'
Aztec
• Prefix must be ASCII characters `]z0' thru ']zC' ('0' thru 'C' inclusive 0-9,A-C)
• Example : `]z0aztec_label_test'
QR Code
• Prefix must be ASCII characters `]Q0' thru ']Q6' ('0' thru '6' inclusive)
• AIM does not distinguish QR from micor QR so devices may read microQR but
transmit and be interpreted as QR.
• Example : `]Q0QR_label_test'
Labels with an "unknown" AIM Id (an AIM Id not specificed above)

• If a label is received that does not have an AIM Id specificed above, and the first 3
label characters qualify as follows:
•the first characters is a ']'
•the second character is a capital or small letter
•the third character is a digit
•then the label type is set to GENERIC_DATA and the "unknown" AIM Id is left
appended to the beginning of the label data.

NOTES

NOTES

NOTES

ASCII Character Set
The table on this page shows ASCII characters and their corre-
sponding Hex Values. The Hex Values in this table are needed
for setting symbology-specific label identifiers, as well as en-
abling custom prefix and suffix characters.
ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Hex

Hex No. Hex No. Hex No.
Char. Char. Char. Char. No.
NUL 00 SP 20 @ 40 ‘ 60
SOH 01 ! 21 A 41 a 61
STX 02 “ 22 B 42 b 62
ETX 03 # 23 C 43 c 63
EOT 04 $ 24 D 44 d 64
ENQ 05 % 25 E 45 e 65
ACK 06 & 26 F 46 f 66
BEL 07 ’ 27 G 47 g 67
BS 08 ( 28 H 48 h 68
HT 09 ) 29 I 49 i 69
LF 0A * 2A J 4A j 6A
VT 0B + 2B K 4B k 6B
FF 0C , 2C L 4C l 6C
CR 0D - 2D M 4D m 6D
SO 0E . 2E N 4E n 6E
SI 0F / 2F O 4F o 6F
DLE 10 0 30 P 50 p 70
DC1 11 1 31 Q 51 q 71
DC2 12 2 32 R 52 r 72
DC3 13 3 33 S 53 s 73
DC4 14 4 34 T 54 t 74
NAK 15 5 35 U 55 u 75
SYN 16 6 36 V 56 v 76
ETB 17 7 37 W 57 w 77
CAN 18 8 38 X 58 x 78
EM 19 9 39 Y 59 y 79
SUB 1A : 3A Z 5A z 7A
ESC 1B ; 3B [ 5B { 7B
FS 1C < 3C \ 5C | 7C
GS 1D = 3D ] 5D } 7D
RS 1E > 3E ^ 5E ~ 7E
US 1F ? 3F _ 5F DEL 7F
www.datalogic.com
© 2015 Datalogic ADC, Inc. • All rights reserved. •

Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered
trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries,
including the U.S.A. and the E.U.
Datalogic ADC, Inc.

959 Terry Street | Eugene |OR 97402 | USA
Telephone: (1) 541-683-5700 | Fax: (1) 541-345-7140
820063814 (Rev. A) April 2015

Magellan 9300i 9400i PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Magellan 9300i 9400i PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Magellan 9300i 9400i PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MagellanTM 9300i / 9400i

Scanner and Scanner-Scale with Imaging Technology

Product Reference Guide

© 2015 Datalogic ADC, Inc.

Chapter 2. Site Preparation and Installation ..................................................................................17

Product Reference Guide i

Chapter 3. Operation and Maintenance ..........................................................................................49

Chapter 4. Image Capture and Customer Service Scanner ...........................................................61

Chapter 5. Problem Isolation ............................................................................................................63

Chapter 6. Calibration Procedures ...................................................................................................75

ii Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

Chapter 7. Programming ...................................................................................................................91

Chapter 8. Imaging and CSS Features ...........................................................................................101

Chapter 9. General Scanner and Scale Features ..........................................................................113

Product Reference Guide iii

Chapter 10. EAS Features ...............................................................................................................157

iv Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

Product Reference Guide v

Chapter 12. Data Editing .................................................................................................................233

Chapter 13. 1D Symbology Programming .....................................................................................247

vi Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

Product Reference Guide vii

viii Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

Chapter 14. 2D Symbology Programming .....................................................................................381

Appendix A. LED/Audio Indications & Controls......................................................................403

Appendix B. Cable Information................................................................................................415

Appendix D. Host Commands ..................................................................................................421

Product Reference Guide ix

Appendix F. Handheld Data Format Requirements ............................................................... 437

x Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

Product Reference Guide 1

2 Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

‘NOTE’ blocks contain information that is helpful and rec-

‘LEGAL NOTE’ blocks indicate procedures or activities

‘CAUTION’ blocks inform you that proper handling (adher-

‘WARNING’ blocks alert you to potential physical harm or

Product Reference Guide 3

Optional features include the Scale (for weighing items)

Figure 1. Scanner Nomenclature

with Platter without Platter

1 Scanning Guides 5 Speaker

4 Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

Product Reference Guide 5

Figure 3. Connector Panel

AUXILIARY PORT EAS SCALE HOST HOST PORT

Connection to Connection to Dual cable units only.

SCALE 0.00 REMOTE IMAGE

USB PORTS REMOTE DISPLAY POWER USB ‘B’ IMAGE PORT

Connection to Models with scale Connection to

6 Magellan™ 9300i / 9400i Scanners

1 Vertical Scan Zone 4 Combined Scan Zone

EAS Tag Deactivation System

1. Checkpoint is a registered trademark of Checkpoint Systems, Inc

Product Reference Guide 7

Rated Weight Capacity

Maximum Static Weight (Overload)

Automatic Zero Maintenance